344
Training Proposal COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 1 Training Description for Enterprise Network

Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Huawei Enterprise Training Path with details

Citation preview

Page 1: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Training Proposal

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 1

Training Description for Enterprise

Network

Page 2: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Training Proposal

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 2

CONTENTS

CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................................. 2

1 Training Solution ................................................................................................................................. 7

1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ............................................................... 8

1.2 WLAN Certification Training Path ......................................................................................... 9

1.3 Security Certification Training Path .................................................................................... 10

1.4 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path............................................. 11

1.5 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path ......................................................... 12

1.6 NE Routers Training Path ................................................................................................... 13

1.7 AR G3 Routers Training Path ............................................................................................. 14

1.8 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path ....................................................................... 15

1.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path ................................................................ 16

1.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path ................................................................... 17

1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path ............................................... 18

1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path .................................................................................... 19

1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path ............................................................................................... 20

1.14 PTN Product Training Path ................................................................................................. 21

1.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path ........................................ 22

1.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path .......................................................................... 23

1.17 Firewall Training Path ......................................................................................................... 24

1.18 Security Management Software Training Path ................................................................... 25

1.19 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path.............................................................. 26

1.20 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path ............................................ 27

2 Required Training Programs ............................................................................................................. 28

3 Training Programs Description ......................................................................................................... 34

3.1 Certification Training Programs .......................................................................................... 34

3.1.1 HCNA (HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training .................................... 34

3.1.2 HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training (Fast-Track 5 days) ......... 37

3.1.3 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training

40

3.1.4 HCNP-R&S-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training ..................... 43

3.1.5 HCNP-R&S-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training .................. 45

3.1.6 HCNP-R&S-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training ................... 46

3.1.7 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Training

(Fast-Track 5 days) .................................................................................................................... 48

3.1.8 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training ........................ 50

3.1.9 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ....................... 56

3.1.10 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network Training ....... 60

3.1.11 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training ................... 62

3.1.12 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training ................... 65

3.1.13 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training ............................................. 68

3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs ............................................... 75

Page 3: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Training Proposal

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 3

3.2.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ........................................................... 75

3.2.2 Huawei VRP System Training ..................................................................................... 77

3.2.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training ........................................................................... 78

3.2.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training ......................................................................... 82

3.2.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ................................................................. 84

3.2.6 IP Technology Fundamentals (Fast-Track) ................................................................. 88

3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs .......................................................................... 93

3.3.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training ............................................................ 93

3.3.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training ...................................................................... 96

3.3.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training .......................................................... 101

3.3.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training ............................................................. 106

3.3.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training ........................................................................ 109

3.3.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training ............................................................................110

3.3.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training .........................................................................112

3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs ...................................................................117

3.4.1 NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training ...............................................117

3.4.2 NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ...........................................119

3.4.3 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M Training)

121

3.4.4 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ............................... 129

3.4.5 NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ........ 132

3.4.6 AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training......................................... 135

3.4.7 AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 137

3.4.8 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M

Training) 140

3.4.9 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ......................... 147

3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) .......... 152

3.5 AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs ............................................................... 157

3.5.1 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 157

3.6 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs ............................................................. 161

3.6.1 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training ............. 161

3.6.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ........ 163

3.6.3 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Basic O&M Training) ................................................................................................................ 166

3.6.4 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

173

3.6.5 S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 177

3.6.6 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ............ 180

3.6.7 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ....... 182

3.6.8 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Basic O&M Training) ................................................................................................................ 185

3.6.9 Campus Switches(S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) ..... 190

Page 4: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Training Proposal

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 4

3.7 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs .................................................... 196

3.7.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training

196

3.7.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training 198

3.7.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O&M Training) ......................................................................................... 201

3.7.4 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training

(Fast-Track) .............................................................................................................................. 208

3.8 WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs ........................................................................... 213

3.8.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training ........................................................................... 213

3.8.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ....................................................... 215

3.8.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................. 217

3.8.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M Training) ... 220

3.8.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training .... 225

3.8.6 WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training ................................................. 231

3.9 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs .................................................................................... 235

3.9.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ........................................................ 235

3.9.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ....................................................... 237

3.9.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training ...................................................... 241

3.9.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training ................................................................. 243

3.9.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training ................................................. 245

3.10 PTN Products Training Programs .................................................................................... 247

3.10.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training........................................... 247

3.10.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training .......................................................... 249

3.10.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ......................................................... 251

3.10.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training .......................................................... 256

3.10.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training ............................................................ 258

3.11 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs ............................. 260

3.11.1 eSight Enterprise NM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 260

3.11.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M

Training) 262

3.11.3 eSight WLAN Management Training......................................................................... 265

3.11.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training ................................................................. 266

3.11.5 eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training ............................................................. 267

3.11.6 eSight SLA Management Training ............................................................................ 268

3.11.7 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training ................................................................. 269

3.11.8 eSight Smart Report Management Training ............................................................. 270

3.11.9 eSight NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training .................................. 271

3.11.10 eSight Access Management Training ....................................................................... 272

3.11.11 eSight Data Center Management Training ............................................................... 273

3.11.12 eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training ................................................. 274

Page 5: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Training Proposal

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 5

3.11.13 eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training ...................................................... 278

3.12 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs ................................................................ 281

3.12.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training ........................................................... 281

3.12.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training ........................................................... 282

3.12.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training .................................................................... 283

3.12.4 Data Center Network Design Training ...................................................................... 284

3.13 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs .................................................. 285

3.13.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training ............................................................. 285

3.14 Security Technology Topic Training Programs ................................................................. 287

3.14.1 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training ...................................................................... 287

3.14.2 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training ...................................................................... 289

3.14.3 Firewall Advanced Technology Training .................................................................... 291

3.15 Firewall Training Programs ............................................................................................... 293

3.15.1 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training 293

3.15.2 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include

Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) ....................................... 295

3.15.3 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training ........ 298

3.15.4 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include

USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) ..................... 300

3.15.5 USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training .................... 303

3.15.6 USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include USG9500

High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training) .................................................. 305

3.15.7 USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Training(Fast-Track)................................................................................................................. 308

3.15.8 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training ...........................................................311

3.15.9 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and

Commissioning Training) ......................................................................................................... 313

3.15.10 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training.......................................................... 316

3.15.11 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and

Commissioning Training) ......................................................................................................... 318

3.16 Security Management Software Training Programs ........................................................ 321

3.16.1 Policy Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 321

3.16.2 Policy Center(TSM) Operation and Maintenance Training(include Policy Center(TSM)

Installation and Commissioning Training) ................................................................................ 323

3.16.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 326

3.17 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs ................................................... 329

3.17.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training ........................................................... 329

3.17.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and Commissioning

Training) 331

3.18 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs .................................. 334

3.18.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................... 334

3.18.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 336

Page 6: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

Training Proposal

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 6

3.18.3 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................. 338

3.18.4 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 340

3.19 Security Planning and Design Training Programs ........................................................... 343

3.19.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training ..................................................................... 343

Page 7: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 7

1 Training Solution

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

XXX Product Installation and

Commissioning Training

XXX Product Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training

XXX Product Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

XXX Design Training

XXX Technology Fundamentals XXX Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training

XXX Product Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

Xd Xd

Xd

Xd

Xd

XXX Advanced Technology

Training

Xd

Xd Xd

Fast-Track

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Page 8: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 8

1.1 Routing and Switching Certification Training Path

Elective Guide

Follow the parts to learn.

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN

Implementing Enterprise Switching Network

4d

Associate

Professional

Expert

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network

6d

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP

Improving Enterprise Network Performance

5d

HCNA (HCDA)-HNTD

Huawei Networking Technology and Device

8d

Page 9: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 9

1.2 WLAN Certification Training Path

Elective Guide

HCNA(HCDA) or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.

Associate

Professional

Expert

HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW

Implementing Small to Medium-sized Business WLAN

5d

Page 10: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 10

1.3 Security Certification Training Path

Elective Guide:

Follow the paths to learn

Associate

HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System

5d

HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network

5d

HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network

HCIE-Security(to be)

5d

HCNA-Security-CBSN

Constructing Basic

Security Network 5d

1d

Expert

Professiona

l

ssional

5d

Page 11: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 11

1.4 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path

Elective Guide

HCNA(HCDA) is required and HCNP-RS(HCDP) is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and

Switching Field Engineer Training.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

HCNA (HCDA)

8d

HCNP-RS(HCDP)

15d

Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training

5d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

Huawei Certified Network Associate

Huawei Certified Network Professional

- Routing and Switching

Huawei Certified Routing and

Switching Field Engineer

Routing and Switching Expert

HCIE-RS

15d

Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert

- Routing and Switching

Page 12: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 12

1.5 IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path

Elective Guide

HCNP-RS(HCDP) or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training

programs.

Enterprise IP Multicast

Technologies Training

5d

Enterprise IP VPN

Technologies Training

5d

Enterprise MPLS VPN

Technologies Training

5d

Enterprise MPLS TE

Technologies Training

3d Enterprise QoS

Technologies Training

1d

Enterprise IPv6

Technology Training

5d

Enterprise Network Engineer

Enterprise HA

Technologies Training

1d Enterprise MPLS

Technical Expert

Enterprise IP Multicast

Technical Expert

Enterprise IP VPN

Technical Expert

Enterprise QoS

Technical Expert

Enterprise HA

Technical Expert

Enterprise IPv6

Technical Expert

Training Path

Target Audience

Advanced Technology Training

IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training

IP Technology Fundamentals Training (Fast-Track)

5d

IP Network Technology Fundamental Training

1d

1d

Huawei VRP System

Training

Enterprise LAN Technology Training

5d

Enterprise WAN Technology Training

Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training

5d

2d

Page 13: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 13

1.6 NE Routers Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

NE Routers Installation and

Commissioning Training

NE Routers Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training

NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training

NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

1d

1d

2d

1d

1d

2d

10d

5d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

5d

NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

5d

Page 14: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 14

1.7 AR G3 Routers Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

AR G3 Routers Installation and

Commissioning Training

AR G3 Routers Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training

AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training

Technology Fundamentals

Training

AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

1d

1d

2d

1d

1d

2d

10d

5d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Fast-Track

Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

5d

Page 15: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 15

1.8 AR Series Industrial Routers Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training

Technology Fundamentals

Training

1d

1d

2d

1d

5d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Page 16: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 16

1.9 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

1d

2d

10d

5d

Fast-Track

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

Planning and Design Training

1d

1d

2d

1d

Advanced Technology Training

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

Operation and Maintenance Training

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

5d

S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training

3d

Page 17: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 17

1.10 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27)Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Installation and Commissioning Training

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/27) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

1d

2d

5d

Planning and Design Training Advanced Technology Training Operation and Maintenance Training

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

1d

1d

2d

1d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Fast-Track

Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

5d

Page 18: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 18

1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning Training

Data Center Switches (CE128/ CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Data Center Switches (CE128/ CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training

Data Center Switches (CE128/ CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

1d

1d

2d

1d

1d

2d

10d

5d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Page 19: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 19

1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

WLAN Installation and

Commissioning Training

WLAN Basic Operation and

Maintenance Training

WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

WLAN Technology Basics

Training

WLAN Planning and Design

Training

5d 1d

2d

5d

2d

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance Training Advanced Technology Training

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training

5d

Page 20: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 20

1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path

Elective Guide

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training

1d

10d

4d

Planning and Design Training Advanced Technology Training Operation and Maintenance Training

Enterprise Network Design

Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network

Design Training

Data Center Network Design

Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design

Training

1d

1d

2d

1d

Advanced Technology

Training

25d

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

ME60 Products

Troubleshooting Training

5d

iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training

2d

Page 21: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 21

1.14 PTN Product Training Path

Plan & Design Implement & Operate Improve

PTN Products Installation and

Commissioning Training

PTN Products 1st Line

Maintenance Training

Planning and Design Training

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

2d

2d

PTN Network Planning and

Design Training

3d

PTN Products 3rd Line

Maintenance Training

5d

PTN Products 2nd Line

Maintenance Training

10d

IP Technology Fundamentals IP Technology Fundamentals

(Fast-Track)

14d 5d

Fast-Track

Technology Fundamentals

Training

Page 22: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 22

1.15 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Path

Elective Guide

eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.

eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.

Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.

eSight Basic Operation

and Maintenance Training

1d

eSight Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training)

2d

eSight WLAN

Management Training

0.5d

WLAN Administrator

eSight MPLS VPN

Management Training

0.5d

MPLS VPN Administrator

eSight SLA Management

Training

0.5d

SLA Administrator

eSight IPSec VPN

Management Training

0.5d

IPSec VPN Administrator

eSight Smart Report

Management Training

0.5d

Report Administrator

eSight NTA (Network Traffic

Analyzer) Management

Training 0.5d

Network Monitor / Traffic Analyzer

eSight Access

Management Training

0.5d

End User Administrator

eSight Data Center

Management Training

0.5d

Data Center Administrator

eSight Advanced Feature Training

eSight Operator

eSight Operation and Maintenance Engineer

eSight Product Expert

eSight Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

eSight MPLS Tunnel

Management Training

0.5d

MPLS Tunnel Administrator

eSight LogCenter (eLog)

Management Training

2d

eLog Administrator

eSight SecureCenter (VSM)

Management Training

2d

VSM Administrator

Page 23: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 23

1.16 Enterprise Network Design Training Path

Elective Guide

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.

Enterprise Network

Design Outlines Training

1d

Enterprise Campus

Network Design Training

1d

Enterprise MPLS VPN

Design Training

1d

WLAN Planning and

Design Training

5d

Data Center Network

Design Training

2d

Enterprise Network

Design Engineer

Enterprise Network

Design Expert

Enterprise MPLS

VPN Design Expert

Data Center Network

Design Expert

Enterprise WLAN

Design Expert

Training Path

Target Audience

Page 24: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 24

1.17 Firewall Training Path

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve

USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle

Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training

USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle

Firewall Operation and

Maintenance Training (include

USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle

Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training)

Firewall Technology

Fundamentals Training

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance

Training

Advanced Technology

Training

1d

5d

2d

Fast-Track

Firewall VPN Technical Topic

Training

3d

USG9500 High-end Firewall

Installation and Commissioning

Training

USG9500 High-end Firewall

Operation and Maintenance

Training (include High-end Firewall

Installation and Commissioning

Training)

1d

5d

Firewall Operation and

Maintenance Training

(Fast-Track) 3d

Firewall UTM Technical Topic

Training

3d

Firewall Planning and Design

1d

SVN Operation and

Maintenance Training (include

SVN Installation and

Commissioning Training) 3d

SVN Installation and

Commissioning Training

1d

ASG Installation and

Commissioning Training

1d

ASG Operation and Maintenance

Training(include ASG Installation

and Commissioning Training) 3d

Firewall Advanced Technology

Training

2d

Technology

Fundamentals

Training

USG6600 Next Generation

Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training

USG6600 Next Generation Firewall

Operation and Maintenance Training

(include USG6600 Next Generation

Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training)

1d

5d

Page 25: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 25

1.18 Security Management Software Training Path

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals

Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance

Training

Advanced Technology

Training

Technology

Fundamentals

Training

Policy Center(TSM) Installation

and Commissioning Training

1d

Policy Center(TSM) Operation and

Maintenance Training (include

Policy Center(TSM) Installation and

Commissioning Training) 3d

DSM Operation and Maintenance

Training

2d

Firewall Technology

Fundamentals Training

2d

Page 26: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 26

1.19 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve

Planning and Design Training Operation and Maintenance

Training

Advanced Technology

Training

Technology

Fundamentals

Training

NIP Installation and

Commissioning Training

1d

NIP Operation and Maintenance

Training (include NIP Installation

and Commissioning Training) 3d

Page 27: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 27

1.20 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Path

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

Plan / Design Implement / Operate Improve

Planning and Design

Training

Operation and

Maintenance Training

Advanced

Technology Training DDoS Solution Operation and

Maintenance Training

3d

iSOC Solution Operation and

Maintenance Training

3d

UMA Solution Operation and

Maintenance Training

2d

Technology

Fundamentals

Training

Firewall Technology

Fundamentals Training

2d

Anyoffice Solution Operation and

Maintenance Training

3d

Page 28: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 28

2 Required Training Programs

Enterprise IP Training Programs are designed as follows:

Training Programs Level

Duration

(working

days)

Training

Location

Class

Size

Certification Training Programs

HCNA(HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate

Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12

HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training

(Fast-Track 5 days) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNP-RS(HCDP) Huawei Certified Network Professional -

Routing and Switching Training Ⅲ 15 6 ~ 12

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing

Network Training Ⅲ 6 6 ~ 12

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IESN Implementing Enterprise

Switching Network Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12

HCNP-RS(HCDP)-IENP Improving Enterprise Network

Performance Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional -

Routing and Switching Training (Fast-Track 5 days) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN

Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security

Network Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of

Security Network Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security

System Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security

Network Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs

IP Network Technology Fundamental Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

Page 29: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 29

Huawei VRP System Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

Enterprise LAN Technology Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Enterprise WAN Technology Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

IP Technology Fundamentals(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Advanced Technology Training Programs

Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

Enterprise QoS Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12

Enterprise HA Technology Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12

Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs

NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12

NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and

Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12

AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance

Training(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs

Page 30: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 30

AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance

Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Installation and

Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and

Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and

Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Operation and

Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance

Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and

Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and

Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and

Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Campus Switches (S series) Operation and Maintenance

Training (Fast-Track) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation

and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic

Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and

Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅲ 10 6 ~ 12

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and

Maintenance Training (Fast-Track) Ⅲ 5 6 ~ 12

WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs

WLAN Technology Basics Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

Page 31: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 31

WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and

Maintenance Training Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12

MSCG(ME60) Training Programs

ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12

ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training Ⅲ 4 6 ~ 12

ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training Ⅳ 5 6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

PTN Products Training Programs

PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12

PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training Ⅰ 2 6 ~ 12

PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training Ⅱ 10 6 ~ 12

PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training Ⅲ 5 4 ~ 12

PTN Network Planning and Design Training Ⅳ 3 4 ~ 12

Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs

eSight Enterprise Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O/M Training) Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

eSight WLAN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight MPLS VPN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight SLA Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight IPSec VPN Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight Smart Report Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management

Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

Page 32: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 32

eSight Access Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight Data Center Management Training Ⅱ 0.5 6 ~ 12

eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Enterprise Network Design Training Programs

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12

Enterprise Campus Network Design Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training Ⅳ 1 6 ~ 12

Data Center Network Design Training Ⅳ 2 6 ~ 12

Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs

Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Security Technology Topic Training Programs

Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

Firewall Advanced Technology Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

Firewall Training Programs

USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and

Maintenance Training(include USG2000/5000

Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning

Training)

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and

Maintenance Training(include USG6600 Next Generation

Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance

Training(include USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation

and Commissioning Training)

Ⅱ 5 6 ~ 12

Page 33: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 33

USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and

Maintenance Training(Fast-Track) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

SVN Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN

Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

ASG Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG

Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

Security Management Software Training Programs

TSM Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

TSM Operation and Maintenance Training(include TSM

Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

DSM Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅱ 2 6 ~ 12

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs

NIP Installation and Commissioning Training Ⅱ 1 6 ~ 12

NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP

Installation and Commissioning Training) Ⅱ 3 6 ~ 12

Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs

DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 2 6 ~ 12

AnyOffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Ⅲ 3 6 ~ 12

Security Planning and Design Training Programs

Firewall Planning and Design Training Ⅲ 1 6 ~ 12

Level Description: Ⅰ: Basic Course Ⅱ: Intermediate Course Ⅲ: Advanced Course Ⅳ: Expert

Course

Page 34: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 34

3 Training Programs Description

3.1 Certification Training Programs

3.1.1 HCNA (HCDA) Huawei Certified Network Associate Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who wish to become a network associate

Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification

Prerequisites

A working knowledge of networks and IT technologies.

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Explain the intricacies of data transmission over IP networks, for competency in supporting,

maintaining and troubleshooting IP networks.

Perform IP address planning for establishing well designed networks.

Navigate and manage Huawei products through the virtual routing platform (VRP).

Build efficient data switching environments through the management of switching products and

manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link layer protocols.

Explain the principles of routing and configure (RIP/OSPF) routing protocols for implementation

and support of effective enterprise network routing solutions.

Establish solutions for enterprise network administration and management through application

layer services including DHCP, FTP and Telnet.

Establish a fundamental network capable of supporting basic communications.

Enhance link layer performance the through implementation of features and services including

link aggregation, VLAN technologies and GVRP.

Manage and support Wide Area Network communications over serial links for a range of

technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and Frame Relay.

Apply Network Address Translation (NAT) solutions for private networks.

Provide Wireless WAN network backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.

Provide effective IP security solutions using various security architectures including Access

Control Lists (ACL), AAA, and IPsec with GRE support solutions.

Describe and implement solutions for unified enterprise network management, including SNMP

and Huawei eSight NMS technology solutions.

Establish truly business capable enterprise networks for real-world industries.

HCNA-HNTD

Huawei Networking Technology and Device

Lecture, Hands-on exercise 10d OARS1

Page 35: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 35

Training Content

ARS1 HCNA-HNTD Huawei Certified Network Associate - Huawei Networking Technology and Device

Module 1-Building Basic IP Networks

Enterprise Network Constructs

Ethernet Framing

IP Addressing

Internet Control Message Protocol

Address Resolution Protocol

Transport Layer Protocols

Data Forwarding Scenario

Module 2-Huawei Device Navigation and Configuration

Expanding the Huawei Enterprise Network

Navigating the CLI

File System Navigation and Management

VRP Operating System Image Management

Module 3-Supporting and Maintaining Enterprise Local Area Networks

Establishing a Single Switched Network

Spanning Tree Protocol

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

Module 4-Establishing Internetwork Communication

Segmenting the IP Network

IP Static Routes

Distance Vector Routing with RIP

Link State Routing with OSPF

Module 5-Implementing Network Application Services

DHCP Protocol Principles

FTP Protocol Principles

Telnet Protocol Principles

Module 6-Local Enterprise Network Features and Services

Link Aggregation

VLAN Principles

GARP & GVRP

Wireless LAN Overview

Module 7- Connecting Beyond the Enterprise Network

Bridging Enterprise Networks with Serial WAN Technology

Frame Relay Principles

Establishing DSL Networks with PPPoE

Network Address Translation

Establishing Enterprise Radio Access Network Solutions

Module 8-Securing the Enterprise Network

Access Control Lists

Page 36: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 36

AAA

Securing Data with IPsec VPN

Generic Route Encapsulation

Module 9-Enterprise Network Management Solutions

Simple Network Management Protocol

eSight Network Management Solutions

Module 10-Supporting IPv6 Networks

Introducing IPv6 Networks

IPv6 Routing Technologies

IPv6 Application Services – DHCPv6

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Max 16

Page 37: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 37

3.1.2 HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate Training (Fast-Track 5 days)

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who wish to become a network associate

Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification

Prerequisites

Those who have obtained the same level technical certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain

Huawei certificate

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Navigate and manage Huawei products through the virtual routing platform (VRP).

Enhance link layer performance the through implementation of features and services including

link aggregation, VLAN technologies and GVRP.

Build efficient data switching environments through the management of switching products and

manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link layer protocols.

Explain the principles of routing and configure (OSPF) routing protocols for implementation and

support of effective enterprise network routing solutions.

Manage and support Wide Area Network communications over serial links for a range of

technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and Frame Relay. Provide Wireless WAN network

backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.

Describe and implement solutions for unified enterprise network management, including SNMP

and Huawei eSight NMS technology solutions.

Supporting IPv6 Networks.

Training Content

ARSA HCNA-Fast Huawei Certified Network Associate - Huawei Networking Technology and Device

(Fast Track 5 days)

Module 1-Huawei Device Navigation and Configuration

Expanding the Huawei Enterprise Network

Navigating the CLI

File System Navigation and Management

VRP Operating System Image Management

Module 2-Supporting and Maintaining Enterprise Local Area Networks

VLAN Principles

GARP & GVRP

Spanning Tree Protocol

HCNA-Fast

Huawei Networking Technology and Device (Fast-Track 5 days)

Lecture, Hands-on exercise 5d OARSA

Page 38: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 38

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

Module 3-Establishing Internetwork Communication

Link State Routing with OSPF

Bridging Enterprise Networks with Serial WAN Technology

Frame Relay Principles

Establishing DSL Networks with PPPoE

Establishing Enterprise Radio Access Network Solutions

Module 4-Enterprise Network Management Solutions

Simple Network Management Protocol

eSight Network Management Solutions

Module 5-Supporting IPv6 Networks

Introducing IPv6 Networks

IPv6 Routing Technologies

IPv6 Application Services – DHCPv6

Duration

5 working days

Timetable

Time Content

Training

Method

1 AM

1.Expanding the Huawei Enterprise Network

2.Navigating The CLI

3.File System Navigation and Management

4.VRP Operating System Image Management

Lecture

PM 5.Basic Operations on the VRP Platform Practice

2

AM

6.VLAN Principle

7.GARP&GVRP

8.Spanning Tree Protocol

Lecture

PM

9.Configuring Layer 3 Switching

10.GVRP Configuration

11.STP Configuration

Practice

3

AM

12.Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

13.Link State Routing with OSPF

14.Bridging Enterprise Networks with Serial WAN

Technology

Lecture

PM

15.RSTP configuration

16.OSPF Single-area Configuration

17.HDLC and PPP Configuration

Practice

4 AM 18.Frame Relay Principles

19.Establishing DSL Networks with PPPoE Lecture

Page 39: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 39

20.Establishing Enterprise Radio Access Network

Solutions

21.Simple Network Management Protocol

22.E-Sight Network Management Solutions

PM

23.FR Configuration

24.PPPoE Server and Client

25.SNMP and eSight Configuration

Practice

5

AM

26.Introducing IPv6 Networks

27.IPv6 Routing Technologies

28.IPv6 Application Services -DHCPv6

Lecture

PM 29.IPv6 Routing Configuration

30.DHCPv6 Configuration Practice

Note:

This timetable is just for reference only, instructor should adjust itself according to the students'

situation.

Class Size

Max 16

Page 40: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 40

3.1.3 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching

Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a network professional

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate

Prerequisites

HCNA certification or the similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Configure OSPF

Configure BGP

Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM

Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP, RSTP and MSTP

Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and QinQ

Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP

Describe the basic principle of network security

List the features of USG

Describe IP QoS end-to-end process

List High Availability technology

Training Content

OPRS1 HCNP-R&S-IERN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network

Module 1-Advenced IP

Advanced IP Address Planning

Module 2-OSPF

HCNP-R&S-IENP

Improving Enterprise Network Performance

OPRS3 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

HCNP-R&S-IESN

Implementing Enterprise Switching Network

OPRS2 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

HCNP-R&S-IERN

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network

OPRS1 6d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 41: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 41

OSPF Routing Protocol Basics

OSPF Neighbor and Adjacency

OSPF Protocol Packet and LSA

OSPF Neighbors and Adjacencies

Calculating OSPF Intra-area Routes

OSPF Inter-area Routing

OSPF External Routing

OSPF Special Areas

OSPF Troubleshooting

OSPF Extension

Module 3-BGP

BGP Overview

Working Principle of BGP

BGP Route Selection

BGP Route Aggregation

BGP Routing Policies

BGP Route Reflection and Confederation

BGP Multi-homing

BGP Troubleshooting

Module 4- Route Selection and Control

Route Selection Tools

Routing Policies

Policy based Route Selection

Module 5- Multicast

IP Multicast Basics

IGMP Protocol Principles

PIM-DM Protocol Principles

PIM-SM Protocol Principles

OPRS2 HCNP-R&S-IESN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -

Implementing Enterprise Switching Network

Module 1-VLAN

VLAN Technology Principles and Configuration VLAN

QinQ Principles

Module 2-STP

STP Principles and Configuration

RSTP Principles and Configuration

MSTP Principles and Configuration

Module 3-Access technology

802.1x Principles and Configuration

DHCP Principles and Application

Module 4-MPLS

MPLS Principles

Page 42: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 42

LDP Principles

OPRS3 HCNP-R&S-IENP Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -

Improving Enterprise Network Performance

Module 1-Firewall

Basic Security Functions & Configurations

NAT Functions & Configuration

Attack Defense & Configurations

USG Firewall Dual System and Configuration

Module 2- High Availability

HA Technology

VRRP Principle and Configuration

Module 3-QoS

IP QoS Overview

Differentiated Services Model Overview

IP QoS Technologies

Class-based QoS

IP QoS Implementation on High-end Routers of Huawei

Duration

15 working days

Class Size

Max 16

Page 43: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 43

3.1.4 HCNP-R&S-IERN Implementing Enterprise Routing Network Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a network professional

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate

Prerequisites

HCNA certification or the similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Configure OSPF

Configure BGP

Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM

Training Content

OPRS1 HCNP-R&S-IERN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network

Module 1-Advenced IP

Advanced IP Address Planning

Module 2-OSPF

OSPF Routing Protocol Basics

OSPF Neighbor and Adjacency

OSPF Protocol Packet and LSA

OSPF Neighbors and Adjacencies

Calculating OSPF Intra-area Routes

OSPF Inter-area Routing

OSPF External Routing

OSPF Special Areas

OSPF Troubleshooting

OSPF Extension

Module 3-BGP

BGP Overview

Working Principle of BGP

BGP Route Selection

BGP Route Aggregation

BGP Routing Policies

BGP Route Reflection and Confederation

HCNP-R&S-IERN

Implementing Enterprise Routing Network

OPRS1 6d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 44: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 44

BGP Multi-homing

BGP Troubleshooting

Module 4- Route Selection and Control

Route Selection Tools

Routing Policies

Policy based Route Selection

Module 5- Multicast

IP Multicast Basics

IGMP Protocol Principles

PIM-DM Protocol Principles

PIM-SM Protocol Principles

Duration

6 working days

Class Size

Max 16

Page 45: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 45

3.1.5 HCNP-R&S-IESN Implementing Enterprise Switching Network Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a network professional

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate

Prerequisites

HCNA certification or the similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP, RSTP and MSTP

Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and QinQ

Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP

Training Content

OPRS2 HCNP-R&S-IESN Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -

Implementing Enterprise Switching Network

Module 1-VLAN

VLAN Technology Principles and Configuration VLAN

QinQ Principles

Module 2-STP

STP Principles and Configuration

RSTP Principles and Configuration

MSTP Principles and Configuration

Module 3-Access technology

802.1x Principles and Configuration

DHCP Principles and Application

Module 4-MPLS

MPLS Principles

LDP Principles

Duration

4 working days

Class Size

Max 16

HCNP-R&S-IESN

Implementing Enterprise Switching Network

OPRS2 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 46: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 46

3.1.6 HCNP-R&S-IENP Improving Enterprise Network Performance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a network professional

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate

Prerequisites

HCNA certification or the similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic principle of network security

List the features of USG

Describe IP QoS end-to-end process

List High Availability technology

Training Content

OPRS3 HCNP-R&S-IENP Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching -

Improving Enterprise Network Performance

Module 1-Firewall

Basic Security Functions & Configurations

NAT Functions & Configuration

Attack Defense & Configurations

USG Firewall Dual System and Configuration

Module 2- High Availability

HA Technology

VRRP Principle and Configuration

Module 3-QoS

IP QoS Overview

Differentiated Services Model Overview

IP QoS Technologies

Class-based QoS

IP QoS Implementation on High-end Routers of Huawei

Duration

5 working days

HCNP-R&S-IENP

Improving Enterprise Network Performance

OPRS3 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 47: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 47

Class Size

Max 16

Page 48: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 48

3.1.7 HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching

Training (Fast-Track 5 days)

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a network professional

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S certificate

Those who have obtained the same level technical certificate in the industry, and hope to obtain

Huawei certificate

Prerequisites

Obtained the same level technical certificate in the industry

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Configure OSPF

Configure BGP

Configure Route Selection Tools

Configure IGMP, PIM-SM/DM

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN and GVRP

Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP

Describe the basic principle of network security

Configure the functions and features of USG series firewall

Describe HUAWEI IP QoS end-to-end process

Configure end-to-end IP QoS

Build and configure simulation of enterprise network

Training Content

OPRSA HCNP-R&S Huawei Certified Network Professional (Fast-Track 10 days)

HCNP-RS(HCDP) Fast-Track 5 days

Configure OSPF and BGP

Configure Route Selection Tools

VLAN principle and configuration

IP multicast configuration

IP QoS principle and configuration

USG series firewall basic functions and configuration

HCNP-R&S( Huawei Certified Network Professional - Routing and Switching Fast-Track 5 days

Lecture,Hands-on exercise 5d OPRSA

Page 49: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 49

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Max 16

Timetable

Day 1

AM Configure OSPF and BGP Lecture

PM OSPF and BGP configuration practice Practice

Day 2 AM OSPF and BGP configuration practice Practice

PM OSPF and BGP configuration practice Practice

Day 3

AM Configure Route Selection Tools VLAN Technology Principle and Configuration Configure IGMP and PIM

Lecture

PM Route Selection and Control practice VLAN configuration practice IGMP and PIM DM/SM configuration practice

Practice

Day 4

AM USG series firewall basic function and configuration IP QoS Overview

Lecture

PM Firewall function and configuration practice IP QoS practice

Practice

Day 5 AM

IP QoS practice Integrated Lab Assessment Practice

Practice

PM Integrated Lab Assessment Practice Practice

Remark

The experiment content listed in the training content just contain the parts of the standard lab

manual, instructors can select according to the situation on their own when actual delivery

The provided schedule is for reference only, instructors can change according to the students’

situation on their own when actual delivery

Page 50: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 50

3.1.8 HCNA-WLAN Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a network associate of WLAN

Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN certificate

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe what WLAN is

Describe the development process of WLAN technology

List typical application scenarios of WLAN technology

Describe the functions and roles of WLAN standards organizations

Describe the related basic knowledge of RF

List working principle and specific property of RF

Describe the working frequency band of WLAN and the basic concepts of channel

Describe the rules of the working frequency band and channel in each country

List other technologies related to WLAN

Describe the latest Huawei product information

List the application scenarios of Huawei product

Describe the power supply mode of Huawei product

Configure Huawei VRP basic command

Configure AC basic attributes

Upgrade the software of AC and AP

Describe the basic concepts of 802.11

Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN

List Huawei WDS network mode

Describe mesh network mode

Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11

List the advantages of 802.11n

Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical layer

Describe spread spectrum technology of 802.11

Describe DSSS technology

Describe OFDM technology

HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW

Implementing Small to Medium-sized Business WLAN

OAWL1 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 51: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 51

Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology

Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol

Outline the general network mode of WLAN

Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN

Differentiate different applications of VLAN in WLAN service

Describe WLAN business configuration processes of Huawei AC6605

Configure the basic attributes of AC

Describe the basic features of Huawei product

List the key features of Huawei product

Describe the basic concepts of roaming

Outline the basic principles of roaming

List the application scenarios of roaming

Describe security threat of WLAN

Describe the related concepts of WIDS and WIPS

Describe the related concepts of AAA

Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption techniques

Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile

Describe the frame format of 802.11

Differentiate three frame types and functions of 802.11

Describe 802.11 media access control mechanism

Analyze media access process of WLAN

Describe the concepts of QoS

Configure WMM-profile

Configure Traffic-profile

Describe the definition and functions of antenna

Describe the main performance indicates of antenna

List some common passive device

List the basic process of the WLAN network planning

List basic interference factors of WLAN

Describe the basic load-balancing ways of WLAN

List the typical application scenarios of WLAN

Describe the network planning processes of WLAN

Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN network planning ways

Describe the functional features of Huawei WLAN planning tool

Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN network

List some functions of eSight

Configure WLAN service

Configure the basic information of AC

Configure AP online

Configure AP-profile

Configure radio-profile

Configure service-set

Page 52: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 52

Configure AP region

Configure AP binding profile

Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of WLAN service

Describe WLAN commonly used fault troubleshooting

Describe WLAN common diagnostic commands and tools

Describe the cause of some common failures of WLAN

Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot some common failures

Training Content

OAWL1 HCNA-WLAN-ISMBW Huawei Certified Network Associate - WLAN - Implementing Small to

Medium-sized Business WLAN

WLAN Historical Overview

Introduction to wireless networks

What is WLAN

WLAN development

WLAN applications

WLAN Standards Bodies

State Radio Regulation of China

FCC

ETSI

IEEE

Wi-Fi

IETF

WAPI

WLAN RF Principles Introduction

WLAN RF basics

WLAN RF principles

WLAN RF characteristics

WLAN Frequency Bands

Frequency and channel introduction

2.4GHz bands

5GHz bands

Other technology

Huawei WLAN Product Introduction

Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction

Huawei WLAN equipment application

Huawei WLAN equipment power supply mode introduction

VRP Introduction and Basic Configuration

Introduce the Huawei VRP

Configuring basic AC attributes

AC and AP software upgrade

The basic operation of the AC

Page 53: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 53

Use hype terminal to connect equipment

Modify the Device Name

Configuring the console user interface

Configuring the VTY user interface

Checking the configuration

Reboot the device

WLAN Topologies Introduction

Basic elements of IEEE 802.11

WLAN topologies introduction

802.11 Protocol Introduction

802.11a/b/g protocol introduction

802.11n protocol introduction

802.11 Physical Layer Technology

802.11 physical layer basics

802.11 physical layer technology Introduction

CAPWAP Fundamentals

AP technology introduction

CAPWAP tunnel introduction

WLAN Networking Introduction

WLAN Network Mode

Forward mode introduction

The application of VLAN in WLAN

WLAN Network Configuration

WLAN configuration roadmap

WLAN Layer 2 Network Configuration

Configure AC and AP to be Connected

Configure global parameters on the AC

Configure the APs go online

Configure WLAN-ESS interfaces

Configure radio-profile, security-profile, traffic-profile and service-set

Configure data forward-mode

Configure VAPs and deliver configuration to the APs

Huawei WLAN Product Features Introduction

The basic characteristics of Huawei WLAN product

The key characteristics of Huawei WLAN product

WLAN Roaming

Roaming concept introduction

Roaming basic principle Introduction

Roaming application scenarios

WLAN Security Introduction

WLAN Security threat introduction

WIDS/WIPS introduction

Page 54: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 54

AAA introduction

WLAN Access Security and Configuration Introduction

WLAN authentication technology

WLAN encryption technology

WLAN access security policy

WLAN Access Security Configure

Configure AC6605 access security

Configure a RADIUS server template

Configure WPA authentication

Configure WPA2 authentication

Configure different Encryption

02.11 MAC Layer Introduction

802.11 frames

Data frames

Control frames

Management frames

802.11 Media Access Control

802.11 media access control Mechanism

WLAN media access process

Huawei WLAN QoS Introduction

QoS and Service Model

WMM-profile introduction

Traffic-profile introduction

Antenna

Antenna concept introduction

Antenna basics

Antenna parameters introduction

Other device introduction

WLAN Layer 3 Network Configuration

Configure data forward-mode

Configure AC and AP to be connected

VLAN planning and allocate in Network

Make the APs gone online

Configure WLAN-ESS interfaces

Configure Radio, security-profile, traffic-profile and service-set

Configure VAPs and deliver configuration to the APs

WLAN Basic Network Planning Introduction

The basic flow of WLAN planning

WLAN signal interference introduction

Huawei load balancing technology

WLAN Planning Scheme and Typical Cases Introduction

WLAN typical application scenario

Page 55: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 55

WLAN planning flow

Indoor AP typical cases

Indoor distributed AP typical cases

Outdoor AP typical cases

Huawei WLAN Planner

Huawei WLAN planner basic function

Plan Huawei WLAN

eSight Function and Wizard Configuration Introduction

eSight introduction

Configure WLAN business by wizard

Manual configure WLAN business use eSight

Configure basic parameters on the AC

Configure AP online

Configure AP profile

Configure radio profile

Configure ESS profile

Configure AP regions

eSight WLAN Maintenance

Manage and maintain WLAN

Operation demonstration

WLAN Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting methods introduction

Common diagnostic commands and Tools Introduction

WLAN common troubleshooting

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 56: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 56

3.1.9 HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand OSI model

Understand TCP/IP principles

Understand TCP/IP security issues

Understand Common attack means

Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.

Understand firewall Main features and technologies.

Understand the Data forwarding process and basic configuration of firewalls.

Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.

Understand firewall Security Policy and configuration

Understand the principles of the NAT technology.

Understand the application of NAT.

Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.

Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic technology

Understand firewall User Management

Understand firewall VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G technology

Understand the concept and functions of VPN.

Understand key VPN technologies.

Understand the classification and application of VPN.

Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.

Understand the principles of L2TP.

Understand the application scenarios of client-initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.

Understand the configuration of L2TP.

Understand the principles and implementation of GRE VPN.

Understand the security mechanism of GRE VPN.

Understand the typical application and configuration of GRE VPN.

Understand the principles of the IPSec technology.

Understand the AH and ESP technologies.

HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training

HC11031 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 57: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 57

Understand the service process of IKE.

Understand the application scenarios and configuration of IPSec VPN.

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology.

Understand the Basic functions and features of the SVN product.

Understand the configuration of SSL VPN.

Understand firewall UTM basic technology

Understand what terminal security is.

Understand the components and deployment of the Policy Center system.

Understand the organizational management and access control functions of the Policy Center

system.

Understand the security policy configuration of the Policy Center system.

Content

HC11031 HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network

Network Security Overview

OSI Model Introduction

TCP/IP Introduction

TCP/IP Security Issues

Common Network Attacks

Basic Firewall Technology

Firewall Overview

Firewall function and features

Firewall device management

Basic Firewall Configuration

Firewall Security Policy

Packet Filtering Technology

Firewall packet forward principles

Application of Firewall Security Policy

Network Address Translation Technology

Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology

NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address

NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address

Bidirectional NAT Technology

NAT Application Scenario and Configuration

Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic Technology

Dual-System Hot Backup Principles

Dual-System Hot Backup Basic Networking and Configuration Commands

Firewall User Management

User Authentication overview

AAA Technology Principles

User Management Application

Firewall Networking

VLAN Feature Technology

Page 58: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 58

SA and E1 Feature Technology

ADSL Feature Technology

WLAN Feature Technology

3G Feature Technology

VPN Overview

VPN Introduction

VPN technologies

VPN classification

L2TP VPN

VPDN Overview

L2TP VPN Technology

Client-Initialized L2TP

NAS-Initialized L2TP

GRE VPN

GRE VPN Overview

GRE VPN Technology

Analyzing the Application Scenarios of GRE VPN

IPSec VPN

IPSec VPN Overview

IPSec VPN Architecture

AH Technology

ESP Technology

IKE Technology

IPSec VPN Application Scenarios

SSL VPN

SSL VPN Overview

SSL VPN Technology

SSL VPN Security Policy

SSL VPN Application Scenario

Firewall UTM basic Technology

Background of UTM

Firewall UTM basis Technology

Firewall UTM Technology Application

Terminal Security

Overview of Terminal Security

Deployment of the Policy Center System

Deployment of Terminal Security Policies

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, max 12

Page 59: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 59

Page 60: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 60

3.1.10 HCNP-Security-CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network

Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge

Has network security equipment operation and maintenance experience

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand firewall device management

Master firewall management by AAA

Master password recovery

Understand the implementation and configuration of traffic limiting policies

Understand the implementation and configuration of SLB

Understand Dual-system hot backup principle and configuration.

Understand the principle and configuration of BFD

Understand the implementation and configuration of Link-group

Understand IP-link principle and configuration

Understand Bypass principle and configuration

Understand Eth-Trunk principle and configuration

Learn about the technology principles of virtual firewall.

Master virtual firewall configuration methods.

Know virtual firewall technology applications.

Understand advanced features and configuration of IPSec VPN.

Understand advanced features and configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.

Understand Scenarios of comprehensive SSL VPN applications in HA.

Understand Basic network attack.

Understand Basic attack defense technologies on firewalls.

Understand Application and configuration of basic attack defense technologies.

Understand the damages and mechanisms of major DDoS attacks.

Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS solution.

Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS solution.

Learn about the installation and configuration of the anti-DDoS solution.

Master troubleshooting method.

HCNP-Security CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network

HC12031 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 61: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 61

Master the troubleshooting of security policy.

Master the troubleshooting of NAT technology.

Master the troubleshooting of attack defence.

Master the troubleshooting of traffic limiting policies.

Master the troubleshooting of HA technology.

Master the troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.

Master the troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.

Master the troubleshooting of SSL VPN. Content

HC12031 HCNP-Security CISN Constructing Infrastructure of Security Network

Advanced Firewall Device Management

Basic device management

AAA

Password Recovery

Advanced Security Feature of Firewall

Traffic Limiting Policies of Firewall

SLB

Firewall Reliability

IP-Link technology

BDF technology

Eth-Trunk technology

Link-Group technology

Bypass technology

Dual-System Hot Backup technology

Virtual Firewall Technology

Virtual Firewall Overview

Virtual Firewall Technology Principles

Virtual Firewall Application

Advanced VPN Applications of Firewalls

Review of basic concept VPN

Advanced Application of IPSec VPN

Application of L2TP over IPSec VPN

Comprehensive SSL VPN Applications

Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall

Overview of Network Attacks

Attack Defense Technologies Defense on Firewalls

Application of Attack Defense

Anti-DDoS Technologies on Firewalls

Common Anti-DDoS Technologies

Anti-DDoS Solution Design

Networking and Configuration of the Anti-DDoS Solution

Troubleshooting for Firewall Feature

Page 62: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 62

Troubleshooting Method

Security Policy troubleshooting

Troubleshooting of Advanced Security Feature

Dual-System Hot Backup troubleshooting

L2TP VPN troubleshooting

IPSEC VPN troubleshooting

SSL VPN troubleshooting

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.1.11 HCNP-Security-CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Be familiar with OS.

Be familiar with 802.1X access control tecnology. Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the current situation of terminal security.

Understand the background of terminal security.

Understand the multidimensional defense system as a terminal security solution.

Understand the relationship among the five elements.

Understand the concepts and components of identity authentication.

Understand the implementation mechanism of security policies during authentication

Understand the implementation principles of multiple access control devices.

Know the terminal security solution design roadmap.

Know how to complete the availability design of a solution.

Know the current situation of document security.

Understand the functions of DSM

Master how to implement Policy Center system.

HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System

HC12032 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 63: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 63

Master how to configurue Policy Center system.

Master the operation and maintenance of Policy Center system.

Master the operation and maintenance of DSM.

Describe the common fault in Policy Center system.

Master the troubleshooting method of Policy Center system

Master the troubleshooting method of DSM system

Master how to utilize diagnoses tools for troubleshooting security implementations.

Master the troubleshooting method of Hardware SACG implementations. Content

HC12032 HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing Terminal Security System

Terminal Security Overview

Security Threats Faced by Intranets.

Challenges to Terminal Security Solutions.

Multidimensional Defense System for Terminal Security.

Terminal Security Design Principles

Overview of Terminal Security Design Principles.

Terminal Security Technology

Policy Center System Overview

Terminal Security System Design Plan

Terminal Security System Installation and Deployment

Terminal Security System Installation

Policy Center System Configuration

Terminal Security System Deployment

Terminal Security System Operation and Maintenance

Operation Management

System Maintenance

Operation Tools

Document Security Management System Overview

DSM Overview

DSM Features

DSM Application Scenario

DSM System Installation and Deployment

DSM Basic Operations

Troubleshooting of Terminal Security System

Roadmap of Policy Center Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Tools Introduction

Policy Center Classic Troubleshooting Cases

DSM Classic Troubleshooting Cases

Duration

5 working days

Page 64: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 64

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 65: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 65

3.1.12 HCNP-Security-CSSN Constructing Service Security Network Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Has network security equipment operation and maintenance experience

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the basic knowledge of information security

Understand the background of content security products

Understand the main technologies used for content security

Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion prevention technology

Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion prevention application scenario

Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.

Learn about virus signatures and the common tools for detecting viruses

Understand major antivirus technologies for gateways

Understand the application of antivirus technologies for gateways

Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering technology

Describe common WEB risk

Understand the key technology of Web filtering

Understand the Web filtering application scenario

Understand the basic concept of spam

Understand the generation and harm of spam

Understand the mechanism of spam filter

Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei

Describe background of deep packet inspect.

Understand the main DPI technology.

Understand the DPI application scenario.

Master the troubleshooting of IPS

Master the troubleshooting of AV

Master the troubleshooting of URL filtering

Master the troubleshooting of RBL filtering

Master the troubleshooting of deep packet inspect

Master the troubleshooting of Database updated.

HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing Service Security Network

HC12033 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 66: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 66

Content

HC12033 HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing Service Security Network

Overview of Content Security

Basics About Information Security

Background of Content Security

Overview of Content Security Technologies

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology

Foundation of intrusion detection and prevention

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technologies

Application of the Intrusion Prevention Technology — NIP

Application of the Intrusion Prevention Technology — UTM IPS

Antivirus Technologies for Gateways

Basic Knowledge of Viruses.

Virus Signatures and Common Tools for Detecting Viruses.

Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.

Application of Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.

WEB Filtering Technologies

Overview of Web Filtering

Website Filtering Technologies

Applications of Web Filtering

Spam Filtering Technologies

Basic concepts of spam

Spam filtering technology

Anti-spam (RBL filtering) technology

Mail content filtering technology

Spam filtering technology applications

DPI Technologies

DPI technologies Background

DPI Overview

DPI Applications

Troubleshooting for UTM Features

IPS Fault Troubleshooting

AV Fault Troubleshooting

URL Fault Troubleshooting

RBL Fault Troubleshooting

DPI Fault Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting of Database updated

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 67: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 67

Page 68: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 68

3.1.13 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei NE Routers

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE Routers

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei NE Routers

Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE Routers

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei NE Routers

Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning

Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware architecture

Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and modules

Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding

List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics

List S12700 Agile Switches software features

Describe S12700 Agile Switches application scenarios

Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei Chassis Switches Routers

Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box Switches Routers

Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training

OSRS1 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 69: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 69

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei Box Switches Routers

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box Switches Routers

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Box Switches Routers

Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box Switches Routers

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei Box Switches Routers

Describe Functions of Huawei eSight Enterprise Network Management System

Describe the Networking Architecture of Huawei eSight

Describe the Technical Architecture of Huawei eSight

Describe Specifications of Huawei eSight

Describe Basic Issues of Environment Maintenance

Describe Methods of Cleaning the Equipment

Describe Indicators of Huawei Devices

Describe Precautions of Parts Replacement

Describe Steps of Parts Replacement

List Common Maintenance Commands

Backup and Restore Configuration Files

View Alarms and Logs of Huawei Devices

Describe the Concepts of Emergency Maintenance

Describe Common Flows for Emergency Maintenance

Describe Flow for Handling Hardware Faults

Describe Flow for Handling Service Faults

Describe Common Steps of Software Upgrade

Describe Precautions of Software Upgrade

Describe Steps of Installing Patches

Describe Basic Operations on the Bootrom

Describe Principles of ISSU

Describe Application Scenarios of ISSU

Describe Operational Processes of ISSU

List the Security Features of Huawei Routers and Switches

List the differences of Security Features Between Huawei Routers and Switches

Describe Application Scenarios of Huawei Routers and Switches

Describe Security Threats on the Network Access Layer

Describe Principles of ARP Attack Defense

Describe Principles of MFF

Describe the Differences Between Firewalls and Routers / Switches

Describe Firewall Features of Huawei AR G3 Routers

Describe Firewall Features of Huawei S7700 SPU

Describe Domain-based User Management on Huawei Devices

Configure Telnet Server on Huawei Devices

Configure FTP Server / Client on Huawei Devices

Configure TFTP Client on Huawei Devices

Configure SSH Server on Huawei Devices

Page 70: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 70

Describe Principles of SNMP

Configure SNMP on Huawei Devices

Describe Steps of Installing Huawei eSight

Describe Basic Operations of Huawei eSight

Describe Principles of Stacking and CSS

Describe Application Scenarios of Stacking and CSS

Configure Stacking and CSS on Huawei Devices

Describe Principles of LLDP

Describe Application Scenarios of LLDP

Configure LLDP on Huawei Devices

Training Content

OSRS1 Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training

Huawei NE Series Routers Introduction

The Positioning of Huawei NE Series Routers

The Hardware Architecture of Huawei NE Series Routers

The Boards and Modules of Huawei NE Series Routers

The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei NE Series Routers

The Characteristics of Huawei NE Series Routers

The Application Scenarios of Huawei NE Series Routers

Huawei AR G3 Series Routers Introduction

The Positioning of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers

The Hardware Architecture of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers

The Boards and Modules of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers

The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers

The Characteristics of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers

The Application Scenarios of Huawei AR G3 Series Routers

Huawei Chassis Switches Introduction

The Positioning of Huawei Chassis Switches

The Hardware Architecture of Huawei Chassis Switches

The Boards and Modules of Huawei Chassis Switches

The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Chassis Switches

The Characteristics of Huawei Chassis Switches

The Application Scenarios of Huawei Chassis Switches

Huawei Box Switches Introduction

The Positioning of Huawei Box Switches

The Hardware Architecture of Huawei Box Switches

The Boards and Modules of Huawei Box Switches

The Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei Box Switches

The Characteristics of Huawei Box Switches

The Application Scenarios of Huawei Box Switches

Huawei eSight Enterprise Network Management System Introduction

Page 71: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 71

Overview of Huawei eSight Enterprise Network Management System

Networking Architecture of Huawei eSight

Technical Architecture of Huawei eSight

Specifications of Huawei eSight

Huawei Routers / Switches Routine Maintenance

Environment Maintenance

Hardware Maintenance

Software Maintenance

Huawei Routers / Switches Emergency Maintenance

The Concepts of Emergency Maintenance

Common Flows for Emergency Maintenance

Flow for Handling Hardware Faults

Flow for Handling Service Faults

Huawei Routers / Switches Software Upgrade

Common Steps of Software Upgrade

Precautions of Software Upgrade

Steps of Installing Patches

Basic Operations on the Bootrom

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Software Upgrade

Huawei device software hot patch installation

Huawei single master board equipment online upgrade

Huawei dual master board equipment online upgrade

Upgrading equipment from Bootrom menu

Huawei Routers / Switches ISSU Feature Introduction

Principles of ISSU

Application Scenarios of ISSU

Operational Processes of ISSU

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches ISSU Feature

ISSU Operation on Huawei S7700 Switch

Huawei Routers / Switches BFD Features and Configuration

Principles of BFD

Application Scenarios of BFD

Configuration Examples of BFD on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches BFD Feature

BFD configuration

BFD for static route configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

Huawei Routers / Switches Smart-Link Features and Configuration

Principles of Smart-Link / Monitor-Link

Application Scenarios of Smart-Link / Monitor-Link

Configuration Examples of Smart-Link / Monitor-Link on Huawei Devices

Page 72: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 72

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Smart-Link Feature

Smart-Link Basic Configuration

Smart-Link Multi-Instance Configuration

Smart-Link and Monitor-Link Configuration

Huawei Switches SEP Features and Configuration

Principles of SEP

Application Scenarios of SEP

Configuration Examples of SEP on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches SEP Feature

SEP closed ring configuration

SEP multi-rings configuration

SEP multi-instances configuration

Huawei Switches DLDP Features and Configuration

Principles of DLDP

Application Scenarios of DLDP

Configuration Examples of DLDP on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Switches DLDP Feature

DLDP Configuration

Huawei Routers / Switches Security Features and Configuration

ACL Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices

Traffic Suppression Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices

Local Attack Defense Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices

IP Anti-Spoofing Features and Configuration on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Security Feature

ACL Configuration

Traffic Suppression Configuration

Local Attack Defense Configuration

IP Anti-spoofing Configuration

Huawei Switches Access Security Features and Configuration

Security Threats on the Network Access Layer

Principles of ARP Attack Defense

Principles of MFF

Configuration Examples of ARP Attack Defense on Huawei Switches

Configuration Examples of MFF on Huawei Switches

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Switches Products Access Security Feature

ARP Security Configuration

MFF Configuration

Huawei Routers / Switches Firewall Features and Configuration

Overview of Firewall

Introduction of Firewall on AR G3 Routers

Introduction of Firewall on SPU of S7700 Switches

Configuration Examples of Firewall on AR G3 Routers

Page 73: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 73

Configuration Examples of Firewall on SPU of S7700 Switches

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches Firewall Feature

Basic Configuration of Firewall on AR G3 Routers

Defense Configuration on AR G3 Routers

Huawei Routers / Switches User Management Features and Configuration

Domain-based User Management on Huawei Devices

Configuration Examples of Telnet Server on Huawei Devices

Configuration Examples of FTP Server / Client on Huawei Devices

Configuration Examples of TFTP Client on Huawei Devices

Configuration Examples of SSH Server on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches User Management Feature

Telnet Server Configuration Using Local Authentication

Telnet Server Configuration Using Radius Authentication

FTP Server Configuration

FTP Client Configuration

TFTP Client Configuration

SSH Server Configuration Using Local Authentication

SSH Server Configuration Using Radius Authentication

Huawei Routers / Switches SNMP Features and Configuration

Principles of SNMP

Configuration Examples of SNMP on Huawei Devices

Steps of Installing Huawei eSight

Basic Operations of Huawei eSight

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches SNMP Feature

Installation of eSight

Using eSight to Manage Devices

Huawei Switches Stacking / CSS Features and Configuration

Principles of Stacking / CSS

Application Scenarios of Stacking / CSS

Configuration Examples of Stacking / CSS on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Switches Products Stacking / CSS Feature

Stacking Configuration on the S3700 Switch

Stacking Configuration on the S5700 Switch

Huawei Routers / Switches LLDP Features and Configuration

Principles of LLDP

Application Scenarios of LLDP

Configuration Examples of LLDP on Huawei Devices

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei Routers / Switches LLDP Feature

LLDP Configuration

Duration

5 working days

Page 74: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 74

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 75: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 75

3.2 IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training Programs

3.2.1 IP Network Technology Fundamental Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe basic structure of IP network

Describe TCP/IP basis

Describe IP addressing and routing

Describe network layer protocols

Describe transit layer protocols

Describe application layer protocols

Training Content

ORS11 IP Network Technology Fundamental

IP Network Fundamental

Data traffic basis

Brief introduction of network and internet

Protocol and standard

Basic architecture of IP network

TCP/IP Basis

TCP/IP protocol stack

Data encapsulation of TCP/IP protocol stack

Case analysis

IP Addressing and Routing

IP address

Protocols of network layer

Working principle of router

Network Layer Protocol Introduction

Describe network layer protocols

ARP protocol

ICMP protocol

IP Network Technology Fundamental

ORS11 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 76: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 76

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Network Technology Fundamental

Using Wireshark to capture and analyze the IP network packet

Logging in to a device through the console interface and checking device information

Using VLSM to allocate IP address

Ping and Tracert testing

ARP/Proxy ARP testing

Transit Layer Protocol Introduction

TCP basis

UDP basis

Application Layer Protocol Introduction

Application layer protocols basis

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 77: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 77

3.2.2 Huawei VRP System Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Content

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 78: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 78

3.2.3 Enterprise LAN Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the development of Ethernet technology

List the standards of Ethernet

Describe the working principle of HUB

Describe the working principle of L2 switch

Describe the working principle of L3 switch

List the Ethernet port features

Configure the Ethernet interface

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

STP Principle and Configuration

ORS35 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration

ORS34 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

GVRP Principle and Configuration

ORS33 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VLAN Principle and Configuration

ORS32 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Ethernet Basic Principle

ORS31 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 79: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 79

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN

Configure the MUX-VLAN

Describe the principle of Super-VLAN

Configure the Super-VLAN

Describe the GARP principle

Describe the GVRP principle

Configure GVRP

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle

List the methods of link aggregation

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the flood process of topology change information

Configure the STP function

Describe RSTP basic calculation process

Describe RSTP port status transition

Describe the function of RST BPDU

Describe the flooding process of topology change notification

Configure the RSTP function

Describe the basic concept of MSTP

Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of MST

Describe the MSTP advanced configuration

Configure the MSTP function

Training Content

ORS31 Ethernet Basic Principle

Ethernet overview

The development of Ethernet network

Ethernet transmission medium

Introduction of standards of Ethernet

The working principle of Ethernet network devices

Shared Ethernet

L2 switch working principle

L3 switch working principle

Ethernet ports technologies

Auto negotiation

Flow control

Port mirroring

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet port technologies

Ethernet port technologies basic configuration

ORS32 VLAN Principle and Configuration

Page 80: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 80

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

VLAN advanced features and configuration

What is the MUX-VLAN

MUX-VLAN configuration and realization

Precautions of MUX-VLAN

Super-VLAN overview

Super-VLAN working principle

Super-VLAN configuration and realization

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features

MUX-VLAN basic configuration

Super VLAN basic configuration

ORS33 GVRP Principle and Configuration

GVRP protocol principle

GARP overview

GVRP overview

GVRP configuration and realization

Hands-on Exercise Guide to GVRP basic principle

GVRP protocol basic configuration

ORS34 Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration

Ethernet link aggregation

Basic principle of link aggregation

LACP principle

Link aggregation methods

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation

Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration

Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration

ORS35 STP Principle and Configuration

STP principle and configuration

Problems Caused by Loop

Calculation Process of Spanning Tree

Configuration BPDU

Topology Change Information

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature

STP basic configuration

RSTP Principle and Configuration

RSTP Basic Calculation Process

Page 81: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 81

RSTP Port Status Transition

RST BPDU

Topology Change Notification

Hands-on Exercise Guide to configure RSTP feature

RSTP basic configuration

MSTP Principle and Configuration

MSTP basic concept

Path Selection among MST Regions

MSTP Advanced Configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MSTP feature

MSTP basic configuration

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 82: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 82

3.2.4 Enterprise WAN Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

List common WAN protocols

List common WAN interfaces

Describe PPP principles

Describe LCP principles

Describe NCP principles

Describe MP principles

Configure PPP and MP

Configure PPP authentication

Describe FR principles

Configure FR

Describe POS principles

Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing methods

Identify common optical interfaces

Configure POS interface

Describe HDLC principles

Configure HDLC

Training Content

ORS41 WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration

WAN Interfaces Introduction

Common WAN protocols

Common WAN interfaces

PPP and MP Principles and Configuration

FR/POS/HDLC Principles and Configuration

ORS42 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration

ORS41 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 83: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 83

Protocol overview and data encapsulation

Link control protocol

PPP authentication protocol

Network control protocol

PPP-MP principle and configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PPP and MP

PPP PAP authentication

PPP CHAP authentication

ORS42 FR/POS/HDLC Principles and Configuration

FR Principle and Configuration

FR overview

FR Configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to FR

FR basic configuration

FR sub-interface configuration

POS Principles and Configuration

POS technology

SDH frame structure and multiplexing methods

Optical interfaces introduce

POS interface Configuration

HDLC Principles and Configuration

Protocol overview and data encapsulation

Configuration of HDLC

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 84: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 84

3.2.5 Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the IP routing process

Describe fields in the routing table

Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup

Configure static route

Configure static default route

Route Selection and Control Feature

ORS56 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

BGP Feature and Configuration

ORS55 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IS-IS Feature and Configuration

ORS54 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

OSPF Feature and Configuration

ORS53 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

RIP Protocol Feature and Configuration

ORS52 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Basis

ORS51 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 85: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 85

Describe the principles of distance-vector routing protocols

Describe the routing loop issues and apply loop avoidance solutions

Describe the principles of RIP protocols

Identify the similarities and differences between RIPv1 and RIPv2

Configure RIP in the network

Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe basic concepts of OSPF

Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types

Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor relationship

Describe the route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF routing protocol

Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol

Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol

Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols

Configure IS-IS protocol

Describe BGP basic concepts

Describe BGP working principles

Describe the route selection process of BGP

Configure BGP protocol

Describe route selection tools

Describe routing policy

Describe policy-based route selection

Compare routing policy and policy-based route

Configure routing policy

Training Content

ORS51 IP Routing Basis

Routing Protocol Basis

IP routing overview

Static route

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route

Configure static route

Configure static default route

ORS52 RIP Protocol Feature and Configuration

RIP Feature and Configuration

Distance-vector routing protocol overview

RIP routing protocol

Hands-on Exercise Guide to RIP Protocol

RIPv1/v2 Configuration

RIPv2 route aggregation and authentication

ORS53 OSPF Protocol Feature and Configuration

OSPF Feature and Configuration

Page 86: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 86

OSPF overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

Application scenarios of OSPF

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Routing Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

ORS54 ISIS Protocol Feature and Configuration

IS-IS Feature and Configuration

IS-IS overview

Basic concepts of IS-IS

IS-IS route calculation process

Comparing IS-IS and OSPF

IS-IS configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IS-IS Protocol

Configure single IS-IS area

Configure multi-area IS-IS network

Configure IS-IS level

Configure DIS electing of IS-IS

Configure IS-IS route import and convergence

Configure IS-IS silent port

ORS55 BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

ORS56 Route Selection and Control Feature

Route Selection and Control Feature

Route selection and control overview

Route selection and control tools

Route selection and control

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature

Route import and routing control

Page 87: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 87

Access control to enterprise data using ACL

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 88: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 88

3.2.6 IP Technology Fundamentals (Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe basic structure of IP network

Describe TCP/IP basis

Describe IP addressing and routing

Describe network layer protocols

OSPF Feature and Configuration

ORS53 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Basics

ORS51 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration

ORS34 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VLAN Principle and Configuration

ORS32 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Network Technology Fundamental

ORS11 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 89: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 89

Describe transit layer protocols

Describe application layer protocols

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP info- center

Perform VRP operate files

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN

Configure the MUX-VLAN

Describe the principle of Super-VLAN

Configure the Super-VLAN

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle

List the methods of link aggregation

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

Describe the IP routing process

Describe fields in the routing table

Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup

Configure static route

Configure static default route

Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe basic concepts of OSPF

Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types

Describe OSPF neighbor relationship

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF routing protocol

Training Content

ORS11 IP Network Technology Fundamental

IP Network Fundamental

Data traffic basis

Brief introduction of network and internet

Protocol and standard

Basic architecture of IP network

TCP/IP Basis

TCP/IP protocol stack

Data encapsulation of TCP/IP protocol stack

Page 90: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 90

Case analysis

IP Addressing and Routing

IP address

Protocols of network layer

Working principle of router

Network Layer Protocol Introduction

Describe network layer protocols

ARP protocol

ICMP protocol

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Network Technology Fundamental

Using Wireshark to capture and analyze the IP network packet

Logging in to a device through the console interface and checking device information

Using VLSM to allocate IP address

Ping and Tracert testing

ARP/Proxy ARP testing

Transit Layer Protocol Introduction

TCP basis

UDP basis

Application Layer Protocol Introduction

Application layer protocols basis

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS32 VLAN Principle and Configuration

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on exercise Guide to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

Page 91: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 91

VLAN advanced features and configuration

What is the MUX-VLAN

MUX-VLAN configuration and realization

Precautions of MUX-VLAN

Super-VLAN overview

Super-VLAN working principle

Super-VLAN configuration and realization

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features

MUX-VLAN basic configuration

Super VLAN basic configuration

ORS34 Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and Configuration

Ethernet link aggregation

Basic principle of link aggregation

LACP principle

Link aggregation methods

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation

Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration

Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration

ORS51 IP Routing Basis

Routing Protocol Basis

IP routing overview

Static route

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route

Configure static route

Configure static default route

ORS53 OSPF Feature and Configuration

OSPF Feature and Configuration

OSPF overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

Application scenarios of OSPF

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Routing Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

Duration

5 working days

Page 92: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 92

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 93: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 93

3.3 Advanced Technology Training Programs

3.3.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Planners and Designers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the IP multicast concept

Describe the IP multicast address architecture

Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP multicast

Describe the SPT and RPT concept

Describe the IGMP protocol principle

Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions

Configure the IGMP protocol

Differentiate the classification of multicast routing protocol

List the features of common multicast routing protocols

Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM

Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast source registration

Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT to SPT

Configure PIM-SM

Inter-domain Multicast Technologies

ORSA3 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Multicast Routing Technologies

ORSA2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Multicast Technologies Basis

ORSA1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 94: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 94

List the key technologies of PIM SSM

Describe the working principle of PIM SSM

Configure PIM SSM

Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle

Configure PIM-DM

Describe the basic principles of MSDP.

Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.

Describe the application of MSDP

Configure the MSDP

Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.

Describe the extensions of the MBGP.

Describe the process that the MBGP transmit the IPv4 multicast routing table.

Configure the MBGP

Training Content

ORSA1 IP Multicast Technologies basis

IP Multicast Basis

Introduction to Multicast

Multicast Address Structure

Multicast Basic Principle

Multicast Data Forwarding

IGMP Protocol Principle

IGMP protocol introduction

IGMP protocol working principle

IGMP Snooping principle

IGMP protocol configuration

IGMP Snooping configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IGMP protocol

IGMP basic configuration

IGMP Snooping configuration

ORSA2 IP Multicast Routing Technologies

Multicast routing protocols introduction

Overview of Multicast Routing Protocol

Intra-domain Multicast Routing Protocol

Inter-domain Multicast Routing Protocol

PIM-SM protocol principle

PIM-SM Overview and Basic Configuration

PIM-SM Protocol Mechanism

PIM-SM Advanced Configuration

PIM-SM protocol configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SM

PIM-SM configuration

Page 95: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 95

PIM-SSM protocol principle

PIM-SSM key technologies

PIM-SSM working principle

PIM-SSM configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SSM

PIM-SSM configuration

PIM-DM protocol principle

PIM-DM overview and configuration

PIM-DM protocol mechanism

PIM-DM protocol configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-DM

PIM-DM configuration

ORSA3 Inter-domain Multicast Technologies

MSDP protocol principle

Overview of MSDP

Peer-RPF Check

Packet Format / State Machine

Application of MSDP

MSDP Configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MSDP protocol

MSDP protocol configuration

MBGP protocol principle

Overview of The MBGP

MBGP Capability Negotiation

MBGP NLRI Exchange

MBGP Configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MBGP

MBGP protocol configuration

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 96: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 96

3.3.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe concepts of IP VPN

List common VPN technologies

Describe GRE principles

Describe GRE application scenarios

Configure GRE VPN

Describe concepts of LAC and LNS

Describe L2TP principles

Describe L2TP application scenarios

Configure L2TP VPN

Describe IPSec technical architecture

Describe IKE principles

Maintaining IP VPN

ORSB4 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Designing IP VPN

ORSB3 0.5d Lecture

IP VPN Applications

ORSB2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP VPN Technology Fundamentals

ORSB1 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 97: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 97

Describe IPSec principles

Describe IPSec application scenarios

Configure IPSec VPN

Describe SSL principles

Describe SSL application scenarios

Configure SSL VPN

Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN

Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution

Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3 routers

List Problems When Deploy VPNs

Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment and the solution

Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment and the solution

Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment and the solution

Describe GRE over IPSec applications

Describe IPSec over GRE applications

Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over GRE

Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3 routers

Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3 routers

Describe security risks of VPDN

Describe common VPDN solutions

Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over IPSec

Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3 routers

Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3 routers

Describe requirements when deploy VPN on Hub-Spoke network

Describe Huawei DSVPN solution

Describe DSVPN principles

Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers

List Huawei IP VPN products

Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei routers

Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei switches

Describe IP VPN features supported by Huawei firewalls

Describe Huawei eSight VPN management features

Describe Huawei VPN client features

Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of different products

Describe applications of different products in IP VPN

Describe methodology of network designing

Analyze enterprise VPN requirements

Describe typical VPN application

Choose appropriate devices and technology for enterprise VPN

Describe eSight VPN management features

Use eSight basic functions

Use eSight VPN management functions

Page 98: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 98

Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN

List common reasons of IP VPN failure

List common commands when troubleshooting IP VPN

Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases

Training Content

ORSB1 IP VPN Technology Fundamentals

IP VPN Overview

Concepts of IP VPN

Common IP VPNs

GRE Principles and Configuration

GRE principles

GRE application scenarios

GRE configuration

L2TP Principles and Configuration

L2TP principles

L2TP application scenarios

L2TP configuration

IPSec Principles and Configuration

IPSec architecture

IKE principles

IPSec application scenarios

IPSec configuration

SSL Principles and Configuration

SSL principles

SSL VPN application scenarios

SSL VPN configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP VPN Basics

GRE VPN configuration

L2TP VPN configuration

IPSec VPN configuration(manual mode)

IPSec VPN configuration(IKE mode)

SSL VPN configuration

ORSB2 IP VPN Applications

Huawei Efficient VPN

Difficulties in IPSec VPN deployment

Huawei Efficient VPN solution

Huawei Efficient VPN configuration

Deploying IP VPN

VPN traversing NAT

Affections of PMTU on VPN deployment

QoS of VPN

Page 99: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 99

GRE and IPSec

GRE over IPSec applications

IPSec over GRE applications

Configuration of GRE over IPSec

Configuration of IPSec over GRE

Deploying Secure VPDN

L2TP and VPDN

Security of L2TP

IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over IPSec

Configuration of IPSec over L2TP

Configuration of L2TP over IPSec

Deploying Dynamic Smart VPN(DSVPN)

VPN on Hub-Spoke network

Huawei DSVPN solution

Configuration of DSVPN

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP VPN Advanced Applications

Configuring Efficient VPN

Configuring GRE over IPSec

Configuring IPSec over GRE

Configuring L2TP over IPSec

Configuring IPSec over L2TP

Configuring DSVPN

ORSB3 Designing IP VPN

Huawei IP VPN Products Introduction

Huawei network and security products introduction

VPN features supported by Huawei products

Designing IP VPN

General principles when designing IP VPN

Requirements analysis for enterprise VPNs

Typical VPN applications

Choosing appropriate devices and technology

ORSB4 Maintaining IP VPN

Maintaining IP VPN with Huawei eSight

eSight products introduction

eSight IPSec VPN management

IP VPN Troubleshooting

Basic ideas of IP VPN troubleshooting

Common reasons of VPN failure

Common troubleshooting commands

Typical troubleshooting cases

Hands-on Exercise Guide to eSight

Huawei eSight VPN Management Operation

Page 100: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 100

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP VPN Troubleshooting

GRE Troubleshooting

L2TP Troubleshooting

IPSec Troubleshooting

DSVPN Troubleshooting

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 101: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 101

3.3.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Analyze the process of IP forwarding

Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding

Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding

List the applications of MPLS

Describe MPLS structure feature that contains two planes

Describe MPLS label structure

Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding

Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism

Describe the process of LDP session establishment

Describe LDP label space

MPLS L3VPN Extended Application

ORSD3 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration

ORSD2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration

ORSD1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

MPLS Technology and Configuration

ORSC1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 102: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 102

Describe LDP label distribution mode

Describe LDP label control mode

Describe LDP label retention mode

Describe the PHP

List the methods of MPLS loop detection

Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing

Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop count

Configure MPLS

Configure LDP

Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the mechanisms of the route and label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN configuration

Describe the extended BGP attributes used by MPLS BGP VPN

Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of MPLS BGP VPN

Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of MPLS BGP VPN

Describe VPN Characteristics

Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN and L3 VPN

Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data encapsulation

Describe VPWS and VPLS Features

List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific scenario

Describe CCC VLL Topology

Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode

Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC mode

Configure CCC in a simple network topology

Describe Martini VLL Topology

Describe how public tunnel and VC connection are established in Martini VLL

Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini VLL

Describe the difference between Martini VLL and SVC VLL

Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple networking topology

Describe the features of VPLS

Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and VC Label

Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid loop

Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology

Configure VPLS

Describe how to access the Internet via the ISP

Describe how to access the Internet via the MPLS VPN backbone

Describe how to access the Internet via different interfaces between CE and PE

Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF VPN

Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF routing information

Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN

Page 103: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 103

Analyze the application and configuration of Sham-link

Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS solutions

Compare the three solutions’ processing in control plane and data plane

Training Content

ORSC1 MPLS Technology and Configuration

MPLS Basic Concepts and Application

Traditional IP Forwarding

MPLS Forwarding Feature

MPLS Applications

MPLS Basic Principle

MPLS Basic Structure

MPLS Label Format

MPLS Forwarding Process

LDP Neighbor Discovery and Session Establishment

LDP Basic Concept

LDP Neighbor Discovery Mechanism

The Process of LDP Session Establishment

LDP Label Management

LDP Label Space

LDP Label Distribution

LDP Label Control

LDP Label Retention

PHP

MPLS Loop Detection

MPLS TTL Loop Detection

LDP Loop Detection

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS Technology

MPLS basic configuration

ORSD1 MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration

VPN Technologies Overview

VPN concept and VPN types

MPLS BGP VPN Basic Principle

MPLS BGP VPN model

Basic concepts of MPLS BGP VPN

The mechanisms of the route and label distribution of MPLS BGP VPN

The data forwarding process of MPLS BGP VPN

MPLS BGP VPN Configuration and Realization

Configure VPN-instance

Configure PE-CE BGP

Configure MP-BGP

Configure the Routing Protocols Used by PE-CE

Page 104: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 104

MPLS BGP VPN Troubleshooting

Basic Principle Review

Troubleshooting on Control Plane

Troubleshooting on Data Plane

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS BGP VPN

MPLS BGP VPN basic configuration

HUB/Spoke network configuration

ORSD2 MPLS L2VPN Technologies and Configuration

MPLS L2 VPN Overview

What is VPN and VPN Classification

MPLS L2 VPN and MPLS L3 VPN Comparison

MPLS L2 VPN Architecture and Data Forwarding

VPWS Reference Model

VPLS Reference Model

Advantages of MPLS L2 VPN

CCC VLL

CCC Topology

Data Forwarding

Configuration Example

Martini VLL and SVC VLL

Martini VLL Topology

VC Connection

Data Forwarding

Configuration Example

VPLS

VPLS Overview

VPLS Components

VPLS Signaling

Data Encapsulation

Mac Address Learning and Withdrawal

Loop Avoidance

Configuration Example

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VPWS

Local CCC connection configuration

Remote CCC connection configuration

MARTINI VLL connection configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VPLS

KOMPELLA VPLS configuration

MARTINI VPLS Configuration

ORSD3 MPLS L3VPN Extended Application

MPLS VPN Subscribers Access Internet

Internet Access via the ISP

Page 105: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 105

Internet Access via the MPLS VPN Backbone

Internet Access via Different Interfaces Between CE and PE

OSPF Multi-Instances and MPLS VPN

OSPF VPN Three-level Hierarchy

Routing Information Propagation and Configuration

Sham-link Application and Configuration

MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS Solutions

Background in MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS Solution

VRF-to-VRF (Option A)

Single-hop MP-eBGP (Option B)

Multi-hop MP-eBGP (Option C)

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS VPN Subscribers Access Internet

Internet access via the ISP

Internet access via different interfaces between CE and PE

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS BGP VPN Inter-AS Solutions

BGP/MPLS VPN solution- option A

BGP/MPLS VPN solution- option B

BGP/MPLS VPN solution- option C

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 106: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 106

3.3.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

A general familiarity with MPLS technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe detailed TE concepts and models

Describe MPLS TE background and functional modules

Describe the content of MPLS TE information distribution

Describe the way of MPLS TE information flooding

Describe the process of MPLS TE information distribution

Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm

Describe the other constrained conditions which influence the process of path calculation

Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE

Describe the basic and extension principle of RSVP protocol

Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE

Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE using static routes

Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE using automatic route

Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using policy routing

Describe the mode of traffic protection

Describe the principle of path protection

Describe the principle of fast reroute

Describe DS-TE functions

Describe DS-TE applicable environment

Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption

Describe the rationale of Tunnel Re-optimization

Describe the rationale of Load Sharing

Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth Adjustment

Describe the combining of MPLS TE with MPLS VPN

MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration

3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ORSE1

1

Page 107: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 107

Configure MPLS TE in VRP system

List MPLS TE application

Design MPLS TE according to the requirement

Training Content

ORSE1 MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration

MPLS TE Overview

What is TE

MPLS TE

MPLS TE Information Distribution

Content of MPLS TE information distribution

MPLS TE information flooding

The process of MPLS TE information distribution

MPLS TE Path Calculation

Path Calculation of CSPF

Other Constrained Conditions

RSVP Principle and Extensibility for TE

The Signaling Protocol

Introduce RSVP Protocol

MPLS TE Path Setup

The Signaling Protocol

The Path Setup Process

MPLS TE Traffic Forwarding

MPLS TE Traffic Forwarding Overview

Static Route Forwarding

Automatic Route Forwarding

Policy Route Forwarding

MPLS TE Traffic Protection

Traffic Protection Overview

Path Protection

Fast Reroute

Comparison of Path Protection and Fast Reroute

QoS of MPLS TE

DS-TE Principles

DS-TE Typical Applications

MPLS TE Advanced Features

Tunnel Preemption

Tunnel Re-optimization

Load Sharing

Automatic Bandwidth Adjustment

Combine MPLS TE with MPLS VPN

MPLS TE Application Cases

Page 108: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 108

Configure MPLS TE in VRP system

List MPLS TE application

Design MPLS TE according to the requirement

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS TE

Static CR-LSP configuration

RSVP-TE tunnel configuration

CR-LSP backup configuration

MPLS TE FRR configuration

MPLS BGP VPN FRR configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Integrated MPLS TE

MPLS TE integrated practice

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 109: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 109

3.3.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe basic concepts of IP QoS

Describe Diff-Serv model

Describe the principle of IP QoS

Describe the classed-based QoS

Configure QoS

Training Content

ORSF1 IP QoS Technology

IP QoS Feature Description and configuration

IP QoS overview

Diff-Serv model basis

IP QoS technology basis

IP QoS application on the enterprise network

Classed-based QoS

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature

Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification

Interface-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic shaping configuration

Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

IP QoS Technology

ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 110: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 110

3.3.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

Training Content

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 111: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 111

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 112: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 112

3.3.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6

Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6 packet format

Describe the packet types of ICMPv6

Describe the packet types of ICMPv6

Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process

Describe the working principle of IPv6 address auto configuration

Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU

Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS

Configure IPv6 address

Configure IPv6 NDP

Configure IPv6 PMTU

Configure IPv6 application

Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6 unicast packets

Describe the principle of RIPng

Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2

Describe the format and processing of RIPng packets

Configure RIPng

Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2

Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of OSPFv3 with OSPFv2

Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation

Configure OSPFv3

Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6

Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology

IPv6 Training

5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ORSH1

Page 113: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 113

Configure IS-ISv6

Describe MP-BGP attributes

Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6 inter-domain routing

Configure BGP+

Describe the function and basic principle of MLD

Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2

Describe the function of SSM Mapping

Configure MLD

Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM

Describe the address structure and working principle of Embedded-RP

Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM

Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast

Configure PIMv6

List classification of the ACL6

Describe the application scenarios of ACL6

Configure ACL6

List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6

Describe application situations of the transitional technologies of IPv6

Describe basic principles of the common transitional technologies of IPv6

Configure common transitional technologies of IPv6

Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS

Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS

Configure 6PE over MPLS

Training Content

ORSH1 IPv6 Technology

IPv6 Basis

Developments of IPv6

IPv6 address

IPv6 packets

IPv6 Basic Principle

ICMPv6 protocol

IPv6 neighbor discovery

IPv6 address configuration

IPv6 PMTU discovery

IPv6 DNS

IPv6 Configuration

IPv6 address configuration

IPv6 NDP configuration

IPv6 PMTU configuration

IPv6 application

Maintenance of IPv6

Page 114: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 114

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 Configuration

Configure IPv6 address

RIPng Principle and Realization

IPv6 unicast packets forwarding

Basic principle of RIPng

Difference between RIPng and RIPv2

Processing of RIPng packets

RIPng configurations

Hands-on Exercise Guide to RIPng Principle and Realization

IPv6 static route configuration

RIPng routing protocol configuration

OSPFv3 Principle and Realization

Differences between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3

OSPFv3 protocol packet

LSA introduction

Protocol operation

OSPFv3 configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPFv3

OSPFv3 area configuration

OSPFv3 aggregation configuration

OSPFv3 virtual-Link configuration

IS-ISv6 Principle and Realization

Overview

IS-IS protocol extensions

IPv6 support in IS-IS ST environment

IPv6 support in IS-IS MT environment

IS-ISv6 configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IS-ISv6

IS-ISv6 multi-area configuration

IS-ISv6 authentication

IS-ISv6 load sharing and route leaking

MP-BGP for IPv6 Principle and Realization

MP-BGP

MP-BGP for IPv6

MP-BGP for IPv6 basic configuration

Building Large-Scale Network Configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP4+

BGP4+ basic configuration

BGP4+ router reflector

BGP4+ confederation

BGP4+ COMMUNITY Attribute

MLD Principle

Page 115: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 115

MLD overview

MLDv1

MLDv2

SSM mapping

IPv6 Multicast Realization

IPv6 PIM-SM principle mechanism

Working principle of embedded-RP

Working principle of IPv6 PIM-SSM

Typical application of IPv6 multicast

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 Multicast

P configuration of MLD

IPv6 PIM Configuration

IPv6 ACL

Classification of ACL6

Match order of ACL6

ACL6 creation

Configuration instances

Hands-on Exercise Guide to ACL6

Configure basic ACL6

Configure advanced ACL6

Configure ACL6 based on interface

IPv6 Transit Technologies Principle and Realization

Introduction to the transitional technologies of IPv6

IPv6/IPv4 coexistence technology

IPv6/IPv4 interconnection technology

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 Transit Technologies

IPv6 over IPv4 manual tunnel configuration

IPv6 over IPv4 GRE tunnel configuration

IPv6 over IPv4 automatic tunnel configuration

IPv6 over IPv4 6to4 tunnel

IPv6 over IPv4 6to4 relay

NAT-PT dynamic configuration

IPv6 over MPLS(6PE) Principle and Realization

Overview of the 6PE over MPLS

Principle of the 6PE over MPLS

Basic configuration of the 6PE over MPLS

Configuration instance of the 6PE over MPLS

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IPv6 over MPLS(6PE)

IPv6 over MPLS(6PE) basic configuration

Duration

5 working days

Page 116: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 116

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 117: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 117

3.4 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Training Programs

3.4.1 NE Routers Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe NE series routers installation process

List precautions when install NE series routers

Install NE series routers

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Training Content

ORT22 NE Series Routers Hardware Installation

NE Series Routers Hardware Installation

NE Series Routers overview

NE Series Routers installation precautions

NE Series Routers installation steps

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

NE Series Routers Hardware Installation

ORT22 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 118: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 118

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 119: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 119

3.4.2 NE Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe NE series routers hardware structure

Describe NE series routers board types and functions

Identify NE series routers board

Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions

Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios

Describe NE series routers features Overview

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance

Perform NE series routers routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction

NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction

NE40E-X routers hardware architecture

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT23 0.5d Lecture

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

NE Series Routers Introduction

ORT21 0.5d Lecture

Page 120: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 120

NE40E-X routers board types

NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features

NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description

NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios

NE5000E/80E/40E route features

NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features

NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features

NE5000E/80E/40E HA features

NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction

NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 121: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 121

3.4.3 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M

Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT23 0.5d Lecture

IP QoS Technology

ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

MPLS VPN Technologies

ORSDA 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Technologies (A)

ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

NE Series Routers Introduction

ORT21 0.5d Lecture

Page 122: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 122

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe NE series routers hardware structure

Describe NE series routers board types and functions

Identify NE series routers board

Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions

Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios

Describe NE series routers features Overview

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route

Describe route selection tools and routing policy

Describe policy-based route selection

Configure routing policy

Analyze the process of IP forwarding

Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding

Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding

List the applications of MPLS

Describe MPLS structure feature that contains two planes

Describe MPLS label structure

Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding

Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism

Describe the process of LDP session establishment

Describe LDP label space

Describe LDP label distribution mode

Describe LDP label control mode

Describe LDP label retention mode

Page 123: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 123

Describe the PHP

List the methods of MPLS loop detection

Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing

Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop count

Configure MPLS

Configure LDP

Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the mechanisms of the route and label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP MPLS VPN

Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN configuration

Describe the extended BGP attributes used by MPLS BGP VPN

Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of MPLS BGP VPN

Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of MPLS BGP VPN

Describe VPN Characteristics

Describe the difference between MPLS L2 VPN and L3 VPN

Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data encapsulation

Describe VPWS and VPLS Features

List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific scenario

Describe CCC VLL Topology

Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode

Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC mode

Configure CCC in a simple network topology

Describe Martini VLL Topology

Describe how public tunnel and VC connection are established in Martini VLL

Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini VLL

Describe the difference between Martini VLL and SVC VLL

Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a simple networking topology

Describe the features of VPLS

Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label and VC Label

Describe how does VPLS forward data and avoid loop

Configure VPLS in a simple networking topology

Configure VPLS

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

Describe basic concepts of IP QoS

Describe Diff-Serv model

Page 124: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 124

Describe the principle of IP QoS

Describe the classed-based QoS

Configure QoS

List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance

Perform NE series routers routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction

NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction

NE40E-X routers hardware architecture

NE40E-X routers board types

NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features

NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description

NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios

NE5000E/80E/40E route features

NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features

NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features

NE5000E/80E/40E HA features

NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

Page 125: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 125

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

Route Selection and Control Feature

Route selection and control overview

Route selection and control tools

Route selection and control

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature

Route import and routing control

Access control to enterprise data using ACL

ORSDA MPLS VPN Technologies

MPLS Basic Concepts and Application

Traditional IP Forwarding

MPLS Forwarding Feature

MPLS Applications

MPLS Basic Principle

MPLS Basic Structure

MPLS Label Format

MPLS Forwarding Process

LDP Neighbor Discovery and Session Establishment

LDP Basic Concept

LDP Neighbor Discovery Mechanism

The Process of LDP Session Establishment

LDP Label Management

LDP Label Space

LDP Label Distribution

LDP Label Control

LDP Label Retention

PHP

MPLS Loop Detection

MPLS TTL Loop Detection

LDP Loop Detection

Page 126: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 126

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS Technology

MPLS basic configuration

VPN Technologies Overview

VPN concept and VPN types

MPLS BGP VPN Basic Principle

MPLS BGP VPN model

Basic concepts of MPLS BGP VPN

The mechanisms of the route and label distribution of MPLS BGP VPN

The data forwarding process of MPLS BGP VPN

MPLS BGP VPN Configuration and Realization

Configure VPN-instance

Configure PE-CE BGP

Configure MP-BGP

Configure the Routing Protocols Used by PE-CE

MPLS BGP VPN Troubleshooting

Basic Principle Review

Troubleshooting on Control Plane

Troubleshooting on Data Plane

Hands-on Exercise Guide to MPLS BGP VPN

MPLS BGP VPN basic configuration

HUB/Spoke network configuration

MPLS L2 VPN Overview

What is VPN and VPN Classification

MPLS L2 VPN and MPLS L3 VPN Comparison

MPLS L2 VPN Architecture and Data Forwarding

VPWS Reference Model

VPLS Reference Model

Advantages of MPLS L2 VPN

CCC VLL

CCC Topology

Data Forwarding

Configuration Example

Martini VLL and SVC VLL

Martini VLL Topology

VC Connection

Data Forwarding

Configuration Example

VPLS

VPLS Overview

VPLS Components

VPLS Signaling

Data Encapsulation

Page 127: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 127

Mac Address Learning and Withdrawal

Loop Avoidance

Configuration Example

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VPWS

Local CCC connection configuration

Remote CCC connection configuration

MARTINI VLL connection configuration

Hands-on Exercises to VPLS

KOMPELLA VPLS configuration

MARTINI VPLS Configuration

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

ORSF1 IP QoS Technology

IP QoS Feature Description and configuration

IP QoS overview

Diff-Serv model basis

IP QoS technology basis

IP QoS application on the enterprise network

Classed-based QoS

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature

Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification

Interface-based traffic policing configuration

Page 128: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 128

Classed-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic shaping configuration

Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration

ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction

NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 129: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 129

3.4.4 NE Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe NE series routers hardware structure

Describe NE series routers board types and functions

Identify NE series routers board

Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions

Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios

Describe NE series routers features Overview

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT23 0.5d Lecture

IP Routing Technologies (A)

ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

NE Series Routers Introduction

ORT21 0.5d Lecture

Page 130: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 130

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route

Describe route selection tools and routing policy

Describe policy-based route selection

Configure routing policy

List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance

Perform NE series routers routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction

NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction

NE40E-X routers hardware architecture

NE40E-X routers board types

NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features

NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description

NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios

NE5000E/80E/40E route features

NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features

NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features

NE5000E/80E/40E HA features

NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

Page 131: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 131

FTP operation

ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

Route Selection and Control Feature

Route selection and control overview

Route selection and control tools

Route selection and control

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature

Route import and routing control

Access control to enterprise data using ACL

ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction

NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 132: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 132

3.4.5 NE20E-S Series Multi-Service Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware structure

Describe NE20E-S series routers board types and functions

Identify NE20E-S series routers board

Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators and functions

Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning and application scenarios

Describe NE20E-S series routers features Overview

Describe the VRP development and history

Describe VRP platform features

Describe VRP8 platform new features

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation

List the VRP8 platform basic commands

Describe the IP routing process

Describe fields in the routing table

Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup

Configure static route

Configure static default route

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT43 1d Lecture

IP Routing Technologies (A)

ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction

ORT41 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 133: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 133

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route

Describe route selection tools and routing policy

Describe policy-based route selection

Configure routing policy

List precautions for NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance

Perform NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT41 NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction

NE20E-S Product Hardware Introduction

NE20E-S routers hardware architecture

NE20E-S routers board types

NE20E-S routes board functions and specifications features

VRP8 platform introduction and operation

Development of VRP and background of VRP8

VRP8 features

VRP8 basic operation

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation

Basic commands of VRP8 operation

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Management of configuration file of CE switch

Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch

ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)

Routing Protocol Basis

IP routing overview

Static route

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route

Configure static route

Configure static default route

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

Page 134: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 134

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

Route Selection and Control Feature

Route selection and control overview

Route selection and control tools

Route selection and control

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature

Route import and routing control

Access control to enterprise data using ACL

ORT43 NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance items introduction

NE20E-S series routers routine maintenance operation direction

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 135: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 135

3.4.6 AR G3 Routers Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe AR G3 router installation process

List precautions when install AR G3 routers

Install AR G3 routers

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Training Content

ORT12 AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation

AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation

AR G3 routers overview

AR G3 routers installation precautions

AR G3 routers installation steps

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation

ORT12 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 136: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 136

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 137: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 137

3.4.7 AR G3 Routers Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe AR G3 product positioning

Describe AR G3 hardware architecture

Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

List AR G3 cards and modules

List AR G3 software features

Describe AR G3 application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance

List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance

Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction

AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction

AR G3 router product positioning

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT13 0.5d Lecture

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

AR G3 Product Introduction

ORT11 0.5d Lecture

Page 138: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 138

AR G3 router hardware architecture

AR G3 router cards and modules

AR G3 router data forwarding flows

AR G3 router characteristics

AR G3 router typical networking AR G3

AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction

AR G3 router software architecture

LAN / WAN features

IP service features

IP routing features

MPLS features

Multicast features

QoS features

Security features

VPN features

High-reliability features

Management features

Voice features

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 router routine maintenance overview

AR G3 router routine maintenance items

AR G3 router routine maintenance risks

AR G3 router maintenance commands

AR G3 router parts replacement

Duration

2 working days

Page 139: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 139

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 140: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 140

3.4.8 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic

O&M Training)

Training Path

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT13 0.5d Lecture

AR G3 Security Features

ORT14 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP QoS Technology

ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Technologies (A)

ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration

ORS41 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

LAN Technologies (B)

ORS3B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

AR G3 Product Introduction

ORT11 0.5d Lecture

Page 141: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 141

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe AR G3 product positioning

Describe AR G3 hardware architecture

Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

List AR G3 cards and modules

List AR G3 software features

Describe AR G3 application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe calculation process of spanning tree

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the flood process of topology change information

Configure the STP function

List common WAN protocols

List common WAN interfaces

Describe PPP principles

Describe LCP principles

Describe NCP principles

Describe MP principles

Configure PPP and MP

Configure PPP authentication

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Page 142: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 142

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route

Describe route selection tools and routing policy

Describe policy-based route selection

Configure routing policy

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

Describe basic concepts of IP QoS

Describe Diff-Serv model

Describe the principle of IP QoS

Describe the classed-based QoS

Configure QoS

Describe NAT principles

List NAT features on AR G3 routers

Configure NAT on AR G3 routers

Describe NAT applications

Describe concepts of firewall

List common firewalls

List firewall features on AR G3 routers

Configure firewall on AR G3 routers

Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance

List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance

Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction

AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction

AR G3 router product positioning

AR G3 router hardware architecture

AR G3 router cards and modules

AR G3 router data forwarding flows

AR G3 router characteristics

AR G3 router typical networking AR G3

Page 143: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 143

AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction

AR G3 router software architecture

LAN / WAN features

IP service features

IP routing features

MPLS features

Multicast features

QoS features

Security features

VPN features

High-reliability features

Management features

Voice features

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS3B LAN Technologies

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

STP principle and configuration

Problems Caused by Loop

Calculation Process of Spanning Tree

Configuration BPDU

Topology Change Information

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature

STP basic configuration

Page 144: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 144

ORS41 WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP Principle and Configuration

WAN Interfaces Introduction

Common WAN protocols

Common WAN interfaces

PPP and MP Principles and Configuration

Protocol overview and data encapsulation

Link control protocol

PPP authentication protocol

Network control protocol

PPP-MP principle and configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PPP and MP

PPP PAP authentication

PPP CHAP authentication

Multilink PPP

ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

Route Selection and Control Feature

Route selection and control overview

Route selection and control tools

Route selection and control

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature

Route import and routing control

Page 145: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 145

Access control to enterprise data using ACL

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

ORSF1 IP QoS Technology

IP QoS Feature Description and configuration

IP QoS overview

Diff-Serv model basis

IP QoS technology basis

IP QoS application on the enterprise network

Classed-based QoS

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature

Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification

Interface-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic shaping configuration

Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration

ORT14 AR G3 Security Features

AR G3 Routers NAT Features

NAT principles

AR G3 NAT features

AR G3 NAT configuration

NAT applications in enterprise network

Page 146: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 146

Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers NAT Features

Easy IP configuration

Configuring NAT outbound will IP pool

NAT Server configuration

AR G3 Routers Firewall Features

Firewall principles

Common firewalls

AR G3 routers firewall features

AR G3 routers firewall configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers Firewall Features

Configuring secure domain and ACL

Configuring black-list

Configuring port mapping and ASPF

ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 router routine maintenance overview

AR G3 router routine maintenance items

AR G3 router routine maintenance risks

AR G3 router maintenance commands

AR G3 router parts replacement

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 147: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 147

3.4.9 AR G3 Routers Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe AR G3 product positioning

Describe AR G3 hardware architecture

Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

List AR G3 cards and modules

List AR G3 software features

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT13 0.5d Lecture

AR G3 Security Features

ORT14 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Technologies (B)

ORS5B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

AR G3 Product Introduction

ORT11 0.5d Lecture

Page 148: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 148

Describe AR G3 application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

Describe NAT principles

List NAT features on AR G3 routers

Configure NAT on AR G3 routers

Describe NAT applications

Describe concepts of firewall

List common firewalls

List firewall features on AR G3 routers

Configure firewall on AR G3 routers

Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance

List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance

Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction

AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction

AR G3 router product positioning

AR G3 router hardware architecture

AR G3 router cards and modules

AR G3 router data forwarding flows

Page 149: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 149

AR G3 router characteristics

AR G3 router typical networking

AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction

AR G3 router software architecture

LAN / WAN features

IP service features

IP routing features

MPLS features

Multicast features

QoS features

Security features

VPN features

High-reliability features

Management features

Voice features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS5B IP Routing Technologies (B)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

Page 150: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 150

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

ORT14 AR G3 Security Features

AR G3 Routers NAT Features

NAT principles

AR G3 NAT features

AR G3 NAT configuration

NAT applications in enterprise network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers NAT Features

Easy IP configuration

Configuring NAT outbound will IP pool

NAT Server configuration

AR G3 Routers Firewall Features

Firewall principles

Page 151: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 151

Common firewalls

AR G3 routers firewall features

AR G3 routers firewall configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to AR G3 Routers Firewall Features

Configuring secure domain and ACL

Configuring black-list

Configuring port mapping and ASPF

ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 router routine maintenance overview

AR G3 router routine maintenance items

AR G3 router routine maintenance risks

AR G3 router maintenance commands

AR G3 router parts replacement

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 152: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 152

3.4.10 Campus Routers(NE/AR) Operation and Maintenance Training(Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe NE series routers hardware structure

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT13 0.25d Lecture

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT23 0.25d Lecture

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Technologies (B)

ORS5B 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

AR G3 Product Introduction

ORT11 0.5d Lecture

NE Series Routers Introduction

ORT21 0.5d Lecture

Page 153: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 153

Describe NE series routers board types and functions

Identify NE series routers board

Judge NE series routers board indicators and functions

Describe NE series routers positioning and application scenarios

Describe NE series routers features Overview

Describe AR G3 product positioning

Describe AR G3 hardware architecture

Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

List AR G3 cards and modules

List AR G3 software features

Describe AR G3 application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

List precautions for NE series routers routine maintenance

Perform NE series routers routine maintenance

Describe the procedure and method for AR G3 router routine maintenance

List precautions for AR G3 router routine maintenance

Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT21 NE Series Routers Introduction

Page 154: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 154

NE40E-X Product Hardware Introduction

NE40E-X routers hardware architecture

NE40E-X routers board types

NE40E-X routes board functions and specifications features

NE5000E80E40E Products Features Description

NE5000E/80E/40E product positioning and application scenarios

NE5000E/80E/40E route features

NE5000E/80E/40Eservice features

NE5000E/80E/40E QoS features

NE5000E/80E/40E HA features

NE5000E/80E/40E IPv6 features

ORT11 AR G3 Product Introduction

AR G3 Router Hardware Introduction

AR G3 router product positioning

AR G3 router hardware architecture

AR G3 router cards and modules

AR G3 router data forwarding flows

AR G3 router characteristics

AR G3 router typical networking

AR G3 Router Software Features Introduction

AR G3 router software architecture

LAN / WAN features

IP service features

IP routing features

MPLS features

Multicast features

QoS features

Security features

VPN features

High-reliability features

Management features

Voice features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Page 155: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 155

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS5B IP Routing Technologies (B)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Page 156: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 156

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

ORT23 NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE Series Routers Routine Maintenance

NE series routers routine maintenance items introduction

NE series routers routine maintenance operation direction

ORT13 AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance

AR G3 router routine maintenance overview

AR G3 router routine maintenance items

AR G3 router routine maintenance risks

AR G3 router maintenance commands

AR G3 router parts replacement

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 157: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 157

3.5 AR Series Industrial Router Training Programs

3.5.1 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the Trend of IOT

Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Scenarios

Describe Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Highlights

Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product Positioning

Describe AR Series Industrial Router Product Architecture

List AR Series Industrial Router Modules and Cards

Outline AR Series Industrial Router Application Scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

AR Series Industrial Routers Routine Maintenance

ORT33 0.5d Lecture

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

AR Industrial Router Routing & Switching Features

ORT32 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution

ORT31 1d Lecture

Page 158: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 158

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle

List the methods of link aggregation

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

Describe the IP routing process

Describe fields in the routing table

Describe the concepts of load balance and route backup

Configure static route

Configure static default route

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

Describe the procedure and method for AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance

List precautions for Series Industrial router routine maintenance

Perform AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance

Training Content

ORT31 Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution

Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Overview

The Trends and Challenges of IOT

Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution

Huawei Industrial Switching Router Solution Scenarios

AR Series Industrial Router Product Introduction

AR Series Industrial Router Product Positioning

Page 159: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 159

AR Series Industrial Router Product Architecture

AR Series Industrial Router Modules and Cards

AR Series Industrial Router Application Scenarios

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORT32 AR Series Industrial Router Routing and Switching Features

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

Ethernet link aggregation

Basic principle of link aggregation

LACP principle

Link aggregation methods

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation

Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration

Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration

Routing Protocol Basis

IP routing overview

Static route

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Static Route and Default Route

Configure static route

Configure static default route

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

Page 160: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 160

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

ORT33 AR Series Industrial Router Routine Maintenance

AR Series Industrial Router Routine Maintenance

AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance overview

AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance items

AR Series Industrial router routine maintenance risks

AR Series Industrial router maintenance commands

AR Series Industrial router parts replacement

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 161: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 161

3.6 Campus Switches (S Series) Training Programs

3.6.1 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei chassis switch installation process

List precautions when install chassis switch

Install Huawei chassis switch

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Training Content

OSW12 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Hardware Installation

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Installation

Huawei chassis switch overview

Huawei chassis switch installation precautions

Huawei chassis switch installation steps

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Hardware Installation

OSW12 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 162: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 162

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 163: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 163

3.6.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features

Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

OSW13 0.5d Lecture

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

OSW11 0.5d Lecture

Page 164: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 164

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch component replacement

Perform Huawei chassis switch component replacement

Training Content

OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction

Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction

Huawei chassis switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

MPLS VPN features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

ORS21 Huawei VRP System

VRP System Architecture

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items

Page 165: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 165

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks

Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands

Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement

Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview

Huawei chassis switch board replacement

Huawei chassis switch cable replacement

Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 166: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 166

3.6.3 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O&M Training)

Training Path

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

OSW13 0.5d Lecture

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) CSS Features

OSW15 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU Features

OSW14 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP QoS Technology

ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

HA Technology

ORSG1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Routing Technologies (A)

ORS5A 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

LAN Technologies (C)

ORS3C 2.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

OSW11 0.5d Lecture

Page 167: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 167

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Planners and Designers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features

Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN

Configure the MUX-VLAN

Describe the principle of Super-VLAN

Configure the Super-VLAN

Describe calculation process of spanning tree

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the flood process of topology change information

Configure the STP function

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle

List the methods of link aggregation

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

Page 168: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 168

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Distinguish routing policy and policy-based route

Describe route selection tools and routing policy

Describe policy-based route selection

Configure routing policy

Describe the basic concept of HA

List common HA technologies in network

Describe VRRP basic concept and principles

Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe BFD basic concept and principles

Describe application scenarios of BFD

Configure BFD on VRP platform

Describe basic concepts of IP QoS

Describe Diff-Serv model

Describe the principle of IP QoS

Describe the classed-based QoS

Configure QoS

Describe ISSU principles

List ISSU features on Huawei chassis switch

List ISSU features use restriction on Huawei chassis switch

Use ISSU features upgrade chassis switch

Describe CSS principles

List CSS features on Huawei chassis switch

Differentiate mainborad CSS and linecard-direct CSS

Configure Huawei chassis switch CSS features

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch component replacement

Perform Huawei chassis switch component replacement

Page 169: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 169

Training Content

OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction

Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction

Huawei chassis switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

MPLS VPN features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS3C LAN Technologies

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

Page 170: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 170

VLAN advanced features and configuration

What is the MUX-VLAN

MUX-VLAN configuration and realization

Precautions of MUX-VLAN

Super-VLAN overview

Super-VLAN working principle

Super-VLAN configuration and realization

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features

MUX-VLAN basic configuration

Super VLAN basic configuration

STP principle and configuration

Problems Caused by Loop

Calculation Process of Spanning Tree

Configuration BPDU

Topology Change Information

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature

STP basic configuration

Ethernet link aggregation

Basic principle of link aggregation

LACP principle

Link aggregation methods

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation

Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration

Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration

ORS5A IP Routing Technologies (A)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Page 171: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 171

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

Route Selection and Control Feature

Route selection and control overview

Route selection and control tools

Route selection and control

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Route Selection and Control Feature

Route import and routing control

Access control to enterprise data using ACL

ORSG1 HA Technology

HA Overview

The high availability of the network

HA Technologies

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

BFD Technologies

Outline of BFD

Packet structure

Detect principle

Typical application in network

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BFD Technologies

BFD configuration

BFD for OSPF configuration

BFD for BGP configuration

BFD for VRRP configuration

ORSF1 IP QoS Technology

IP QoS Feature Description and configuration

IP QoS overview

Diff-Serv model basis

IP QoS technology basis

IP QoS application on the enterprise network

Classed-based QoS

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature

Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification

Page 172: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 172

Interface-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic shaping configuration

Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration

OSW14 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) ISSU Features

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)ISSU features

ISSU principles

ISSU operational procedure

ISSU feature application scenarios

ISSU features use restriction

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)ISSU Features Hands-on Exercise

ISSU equipment upgrade

OSW15 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) CSS Features

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)CSS Features

CSS principles

CSS operational procedure

CSS feature application scenarios

CSS features use restriction

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77)CSS Features Hands-on Exercise

Mainborad CSS exercise

Linecard-direct CSS exercise

OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks

Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands

Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement

Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview

Huawei chassis switch board replacement

Huawei chassis switch cable replacement

Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 173: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 173

3.6.4 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Operation and Maintenance Training

(Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Planners and Designers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

OSW13 0.5d Lecture

IP Routing Technologies (B)

ORS5B 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

LAN Technologies (B)

ORS3B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Product

OSW11 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 174: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 174

Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features

Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe calculation process of spanning tree

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the flood process of topology change information

Configure the STP function

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Describe the route calculation process of link state algorithm

Describe the basic concept of OSPF

Describe OSPF protocol packets

Describe route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF protocol

Describe the principle of BGP protocol

Describe the common attributes of BGP protocol

Describe BGP protocol route selection process

Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and IGP protocol

Configure BGP protocol

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch component replacement

Perform Huawei chassis switch component replacement

Training Content

OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction

Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Page 175: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 175

Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction

Huawei chassis switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

MPLS VPN features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS3B LAN Technologies

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on exercise to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

STP principle and configuration

Problems Caused by Loop

Calculation Process of Spanning Tree

Configuration BPDU

Topology Change Information

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature

STP basic configuration

ORS5B IP Routing Technologies (B)

OSPF protocol feature and configuration

Page 176: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 176

OSPF protocol overview

Basic OSPF concepts

OSPF route calculation

OSPF configuration

OSPF application scenarios

Hands-on Exercise Guide to OSPF Protocol

Single OSPF area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

OSPF special area configuration

External route import configuration

OSPF default route configuration

BGP Feature and Configuration

BGP overview

BGP route transfer process

BGP path control and selection

Configuration of BGP

Hands-on Exercise Guide to BGP Protocol

IBGP and EBGP

BGP route aggregation

BGP attributes and path selection

OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks

Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands

Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement

Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview

Huawei chassis switch board replacement

Huawei chassis switch cable replacement

Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 177: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 177

3.6.5 S12700 Series Agile Switches Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Planners and Designers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning

Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware architecture

Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and modules

Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding

List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics

List S12700 Agile Switches software features

S12700 Series Agile Switches Routine Maintenance

OSW54 0.5d Lecture

S Switches EasyOperation Solution

OSW53 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

S Switches New Technologies

OSW52 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

S12700 Series Agile Switches Product Introduction

OSW51 0.5d Lecture, Demo

Page 178: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 178

Describe S12700 Agile Switches application scenarios

Describe VRP architecture

Use VRP basic commands

Describe VRP info-center

Operate VRP files

Describe LNP principles

Configure LNP

Describe VCMP principles

Configure VCMP

Outline EasyOperation principles

Understand related technologies of EasyOperation

Use EasyOperation features to deploy and maintain network

Describe S12700 Agile Switches routine maintenance

Describe the procedure and method for S12700 Agile Switch routine maintenance

List precautions for S12700 Agile Switch routine maintenance

Perform S12700 Agile Switch routine maintenance

Describe the procedure and method for S12700 Agile Switch parts replacement

List precautions for S12700 Agile Switch component replacement

Perform S12700 Agile Switch component replacement

Training Content

OSW51 S12700 Series Agile Switches Product Introduction

S12700 Series Agile Switches Product Introduction

Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

Page 179: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 179

OSW52 S Switches New Technologies

LNP principles and application

LNP principles overview

LNP configuration and application

VCMP principles and application

VCMP principles overview

VCMP configuration and application

Hands-on Exercise Guide to LNP principles and application

LNP typical configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VCMP principles and application

VCMP typical configuration

OSW53 S Switches EasyOperation Solution

S Switches EasyOperation Solution

EasyOperation background

EasyOperation realization

EasyOperation applications

Hands-on Exercise Guide to S Switches EasyOperation Solution

EasyOperation deployment

EasyOperation maintenance

OSW54 S12700 Series Agile Switches Routine Maintenance

S12700 Agile Switches routine maintenance

S12700 Agile switch routine maintenance overview

S12700 Agile switch routine maintenance items

S12700 Agile switch routine maintenance risks

S12700 Agile switch maintenance commands

S12700 Agile Switches part replacement

S12700 Agile switch parts replacement overview

S12700 Agile switch board replacement

S12700 Agile switch cable replacement

S12700 Agile switch other parts replacement

Duration

3 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 180: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 180

3.6.6 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei box switch installation process

List precautions when install Huawei box switch

Install Huawei box switch

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Training Content

OSW22 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Installation

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Hardware Installation

Huawei box switch overview

Huawei box switch installation precautions

Huawei box switch installation steps

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Installation

OSW22 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 181: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 181

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 182: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 182

3.6.7 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei box switch product positioning

Describe Huawei box switch hardware architecture

Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules

Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding flows

List Huawei box switch characteristic function

List Huawei box switch software features

Describe Huawei box switch application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the contents and methods of routine maintenance to Huawei box switches

List the notices of routine maintenance to box switches

Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box switches

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

OSW23 0.5d Lecture

Huawei VRP System

ORS21 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction

OSW21 0.5d Lecture

Page 183: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 183

Describe the methods and procedures of replacing Huawei box switches components

Lists the matters needing attention of replacing Huawei box switches components

Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches components

Training Content

OSW21 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Introduction

Huawei box switch product positioning

Huawei box switch hardware architecture

Huawei box switch cards and modules

Huawei box switch data forwarding flows

Huawei box switch characteristic function

Huawei box switch application scenarios

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Software Features Introduction

Huawei box switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

OSW23 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance overview

Projects of routine maintenance

Risks of routine maintenance

Common maintenance commands

Page 184: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 184

Box switches components replacing

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 185: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 185

3.6.8 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Operation and Maintenance Training

(Including the Basic O&M Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Planners and Designers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei box switch product positioning

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

OSW23 0.5d Lecture

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

OSW24 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VRRP Feature and Configuration

ORSGA 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

LAN Technologies (A)

ORS3A 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction

OSW21 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 186: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 186

Describe Huawei box switch hardware architecture

Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules

Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding flows

List Huawei box switch characteristic function

List Huawei box switch software features

Describe Huawei box switch application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN

Configure the MUX-VLAN

Describe the principle of Super-VLAN

Configure the Super-VLAN

Describe calculation process of spanning tree

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the flood process of topology change information

Configure the STP function

Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle

Configure VRRP protocol

List the security risks of network access layer

List ACL types

List the application of ACL

Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense

Describe DHCP-Snooping principle

Describe ARP security feature of Huawei switches

Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches

List the defense of ARP attack

List the security features of Huawei switches

Configure the prevention of ARP attack

Configure MFF feature

Describe the contents and methods of routine maintenance to Huawei box switches

List the notices of routine maintenance to box switches

Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box switches

Describe the methods and procedures of replacing Huawei box switches components

Lists the matters needing attention of replacing Huawei box switches components

Page 187: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 187

Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches components

Training Content

OSW21 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Introduction

Huawei box switch product positioning

Huawei box switch hardware architecture

Huawei box switch cards and modules

Huawei box switch data forwarding flows

Huawei box switch characteristic function

Huawei box switch application scenarios

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Software Features Introduction

Huawei box switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS3A LAN Technologies

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

Page 188: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 188

VLAN advanced features and configuration

What is the MUX-VLAN

MUX-VLAN configuration and realization

Precautions of MUX-VLAN

Super-VLAN overview

Super-VLAN working principle

Super-VLAN configuration and realization

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN advanced features

MUX-VLAN basic configuration

Super VLAN basic configuration

STP principle and configuration

Problems Caused by Loop

Calculation Process of Spanning Tree

Configuration BPDU

Topology Change Information

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature

STP basic configuration

ORSGA VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

OSW24 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

Security risks of network access layer

ACL technology overview

ARP attack principle

MFF feature

Traffic Suppression Feature

Local Defense Feature

Hands-on Exercises Guide to Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

Configure ACL for packet filtering

Configure traffic suppression feature

Configure local defense feature

Configure ARP attack defense

Configure MFF feature

OSW23 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

Page 189: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 189

Routine maintenance overview

Projects of routine maintenance

Risks of routine maintenance

Common maintenance commands

Box switches components replacing

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 190: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 190

3.6.9 Campus Switches(S series) Operation and Maintenance Training (Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

OSW23 0.25d Lecture

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

OSW13 0.25d Lecture

VRRP Feature and Configuration

ORSGA 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

OSW24 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

LAN Technologies (B)

ORS3B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei VRP Quickstart

ORS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction

OSW21 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

OSW11 0.5d Lecture

Page 191: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 191

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Describe Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Describe Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Describe Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Describe Huawei chassis switch product software features

Describe Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Describe Huawei box switch product positioning

Describe Huawei box switch hardware architecture

Describe Huawei box switch cards and modules

Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding flows

List Huawei box switch characteristic function

List Huawei box switch software features

Describe Huawei box switch application scenarios

Describe the VRP architecture

Use basic operation commands

Describe the function of VRP information center

Perform VRP operate files

Operate VRP upgrade software

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the principle of VLAN

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication principle

Configure the inter-VLAN communication

Describe calculation process of spanning tree

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the flood process of topology change information

Configure the STP function

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle

List the methods of link aggregation

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

List the security risks of network access layer

List ACL types

List the application of ACL

Describe the principle of ARP attack and defense

Describe DHCP-Snooping principle

Describe ARP security feature of Huawei switches

Page 192: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 192

Describe MFF feature of Huawei switches

List the defense of ARP attack

List the security features of Huawei switches

Configure the prevention of ARP attack

Configure MFF feature

Describe VRRP protocol concept and principle

Configure VRRP protocol

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Perform Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance

Describe the procedure and method for Huawei chassis switch parts replacement

List precautions for Huawei chassis switch

Describe the contents and methods of routine maintenance to Huawei box switches

List the notices of routine maintenance to box switches

Perform the routine maintenance of Huawei box switches

Describe the methods and procedures of replacing Huawei box switches components

Lists the matters needing attention of replacing Huawei box switches components

Perform the replacing of Huawei box switches components

Training Content

OSW11 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Product Introduction

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Hardware Introduction

Huawei chassis switch product positioning

Huawei chassis switch product hardware architecture

Huawei chassis switch product cards and modules

Huawei chassis switch product data forwarding flows

Huawei chassis switch product characteristic function

Huawei chassis switch product application scenarios

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Software Features Introduction

Huawei chassis switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

MPLS VPN features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

OSW21 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Product Introduction

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware Introduction

Huawei box switch product positioning

Page 193: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 193

Huawei box switch hardware architecture

Huawei box switch cards and modules

Huawei box switch data forwarding flows

Huawei box switch characteristic function

Huawei box switch application scenarios

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27)Software Features Introduction

Huawei box switch software architecture

Ethernet features

IP routing features

High-reliability features

QoS features

IP service features

Multicast features

Security features

Management features

ORS22 Huawei VRP Quickstart

Huawei VRP Quickstart

VRP overview

VRP Basic Configuration

VRP Information Center

VRP file operation

VRP software upgrade

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Huawei VRP Configuration Basics

VRP basic operation configuration

Remote device management

Terminal information output control

File system management

FTP operation

ORS3B LAN Technologies

The VLAN basic principle and configuration

VLAN introduction

The application rules of VLAN labels

What is the VLAN routing

Configure the VLAN routing

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VLAN basis

VLAN basic principle configuration

STP principle and configuration

Problems Caused by Loop

Calculation Process of Spanning Tree

Configuration BPDU

Topology Change Information

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP feature

STP basic configuration

Page 194: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 194

Ethernet link aggregation

Basic principle of link aggregation

LACP principle

Link aggregation methods

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation

Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration

Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration

Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

Security risks of network access layer

ACL technology overview

ARP attack principle

MFF feature

Traffic Suppression Feature

Local Defense Feature

Hands-on Exercises Guide to Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Security Feature

Configure ACL for packet filtering

Configure traffic suppression feature

Configure local defense feature

Configure ARP attack defense

Configure MFF feature

ORSGA VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP Feature and Configuration

VRRP overview

VRRP principle

VRRP configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRRP Feature

VRRP basic configuration

Configure VRRP tracking uplink interface

Special VRRP priority configuration

OSW13 Chassis Switches (S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Routine Maintenance

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance overview

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance items

Huawei chassis switch routine maintenance risks

Huawei chassis switch maintenance commands

Huawei Chassis Switch Parts Replacement

Huawei chassis switch parts replacement overview

Huawei chassis switch board replacement

Huawei chassis switch cable replacement

Huawei chassis switch other parts replacement

OSW23 Box Switches (S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

Page 195: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 195

Huawei Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance overview

Projects of routine maintenance

Risks of routine maintenance

Common maintenance commands

Box switches components replacing

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 196: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 196

3.7 Data Center Switches (CE Series) Training Programs

3.7.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning

Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the installation procedure of CE series switch

List the precaution of hardware installation of CE series switch

Install CE series switch

Describe the VRP development and history

Describe VRP platform features

Describe VRP8 platform new features

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation

List the VRP8 platform basic commands

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Mange the configuration file on CE switch

Use the FTP function on CE switch

Training Content

OSW34 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Hardware Installation

CE series switches hardware installation

TOR switch hardware installation

CE12800 series switch chassis installation

CE12800 series switch boards installation

CE12800 series switch cables installation

VRP8 Platform Introduction

OSW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Hardware Installation

OSW34 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 197: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 197

The pre-check before power on

OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction

VRP8 platform introduction and operation

Development of VRP and background of VRP8

VRP8 features

VRP8 basic operation

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation

Basic commands of VRP8 operation

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Management of configuration file of CE switch

Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 198: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 198

3.7.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Basic Operation and Maintenance

Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the hardware architecture of CE series data center switch

Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE series data center switch

List the features of CE series data center switch

Describe the application of CE series data center switch

Describe the VRP development and history

Describe VRP platform features

Describe VRP8 platform new features

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation

List the VRP8 platform basic commands

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Mange the configuration file on CE switch

Use the FTP function on CE switch

Describe the contents of maintenance of CE series switch

Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE series switch

Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch

Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 series switch

Data Center Switch (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance

OSW3A 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VRP8 Platform Introduction

OSW32 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction

OSW31 0.5d Lecture

Page 199: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 199

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch

Describe the ISSU software upgrade on CE12800 switch

Training Content

OSW31 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction

CE Series Switch product introduction

CE series data center switch product position

CE series data center switch product architecture

CE series data center switch boards and modules

CE series data center switch data forwarding

CE series data center switch product features

CE series data center switch applications

OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction

VRP8 platform introduction and operation

Development of VRP and background of VRP8

VRP8 features

VRP8 basic operation

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation

Basic commands of VRP8 operation

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Management of configuration file of CE switch

Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch

OSW3A Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance

CE series switch runtime maintenance

The contents of maintenance

The precautions of maintenance

The parts replacement of TOR switch

The parts replacement of CE12800 switch

CE series switch System software upgrade

Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch

Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch

ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch

Hands-on Exercise Guide to system software upgrade on CE series switch

Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch

Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch

Page 200: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 200

ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 201: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 201

3.7.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance

Training (Including the Basic O&M Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Data Center Switch (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance

OSW3A 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP QoS Technology

ORSF1 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

IP Multicast Routing Technologies

ORSA2 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

LAN Technologies (D)

ORS3D 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Data Center Network Key technologies

OSW36 3.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei Data Center Network Solution

OSW33 0.5d Lecture

VRP8 Platform Introduction

OSW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction

OSW31 0.5d Lecture

Page 202: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 202

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the hardware architecture of CE series data center switch

Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE series data center switch

List the features of CE series data center switch

Describe the application of CE series data center switch

Describe the VRP development and history

Describe VRP platform features

Describe VRP8 platform new features

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation

List the VRP8 platform basic commands

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Mange the configuration file on CE switch

Use the FTP function on CE switch

Describe the architecture of data center

Describe the data center development

Describe Huawei data center network solution

Describe FC SAN network basic architecture

Describe FCOE network basic architecture

Describe the FCOE implementation of related technologies

Describe DCB function technical principle

Describe the application in data center network of FCOE

Describe the background of TRILL

Describe the basic concept of TRILL

Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL

Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network

Describe the application of TRILL in modern network

Configure TRILL protocol

Describe the principle of stack technology

Describe the stack technology realization on CE switch

Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and CE12800 switch

List the procedure of configuration of stack on TOR switch

List the procedure of configuration of stack on CE12800 switch

Describe background of VS technology

Describe the realization of VS technology

Describe the principle of VS technology

Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE switch

Page 203: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 203

Describe the background of VM virtual migration

Describe the technologies for VM virtual migration

Describe the procedure of realization of VM virtual migration

Describe the solution of Huawei nCenter network implementation

Describe STP functions

Describe STP implementation

Describe RSTP improvement compared with STP

Describe MSTP calculation

Configure STP, RSTP, MSTP

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the LACP basic principle

List the methods of link aggregation

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

Differentiate the classification of multicast routing protocol

List the features of common multicast routing protocols

Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM

Describe the join procedure of RPT and multicast source registration

Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT to SPT

Configure PIM-SM

List the key technologies of PIM SSM

Describe the working principle of PIM SSM

Configure PIM SSM

Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle

Configure PIM-DM

Describe basic concepts of IP QoS

Describe Diff-Serv model

Describe the principle of IP QoS

Describe the classed-based QoS

Configure QoS

Describe the contents of maintenance of CE series switch

Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE series switch

Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch

Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 series switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch

Describe the ISSU software upgrade on CE12800 switch

Training Content

OSW31 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction

CE Series Switch product introduction

Page 204: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 204

CE series data center switch product position

CE series data center switch product architecture

CE series data center switch boards and modules

CE series data center switch data forwarding

CE series data center switch product features

CE series data center switch applications

OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction

VRP8 platform introduction and operation

Development of VRP and background of VRP8

VRP8 features

VRP8 basic operation

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation

Basic commands of VRP8 operation

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Management of configuration file of CE switch

Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch

OSW33 Huawei Data Center Network Solution

Data center network solution introduction

Overview of data center network

Development of data center network

Huawei data center network solution

OSW36 Data Center Network Key technologies

CE series switch FCOE feature introduction

The development of data center network

FC SAN network overview

FCOE network overview

FCOE working principle

Huawei FCOE network solution

Hands-on Exercise Guide to FCOE feature

FIP Snooping configuration

DCB function configuration

CE series switch TRILL feature introduction

TRILL technology overview

TRILL protocol mechanism

TRILL network data forwarding

TRILL application in network

TRILL basic configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to TRILL feature

TRILL basic configuration

TRILL route selection control

TRILL security authentication configuration

CE series switch stack feature introduction

Page 205: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 205

Stack technology overview

The procedure to realize stack

The common applications of stack

Stack system data forwarding and failure switchover

Stack system basic configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to stack feature

Establish the stack system on TOR switch

Join the stack system for TOR switch

Establish the stack system on CE12800 switch

CE series switch VS feature introduction

The background of VS

VS technology overview

VS technology principle

VS basic configuration

VS applications in network

nCenter virtual perception introduction

background of VM virtual migration

the technologies for VM virtual migration

the procedure of VM virtual migration realization

nCenter virtual perception implementation solution

ORS3D LAN Technologies

STP Principle and Configuration

STP Overview

MSTP Overview

MSTP Configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to STP features

STP basic configuration

RSTP basic configuration

MSTP basic configuration

Ethernet link aggregation

Basic principle of link aggregation

LACP principle

Link aggregation methods

Hands-on Exercise Guide to Ethernet link aggregation

Manual load balancing mode of link aggregation configuration

Static LACP mode of link aggregation configuration

ORSA2 IP Multicast Routing Technologies

Multicast routing protocols introduction

Overview of Multicast Routing Protocol

Intra-domain Multicast Routing Protocol

Inter-domain Multicast Routing Protocol

PIM-SM protocol principle

Page 206: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 206

PIM-SM Overview and Basic Configuration

PIM-SM Protocol Mechanism

PIM-SM Advanced Configuration

PIM-SM protocol configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SM

PIM-SM configuration

PIM-SSM protocol principle

PIM-SSM key technologies

PIM-SSM working principle

PIM-SSM configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-SSM

PIM-SSM configuration

PIM-DM protocol principle

PIM-DM overview and configuration

PIM-DM protocol mechanism

PIM-DM protocol configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to PIM-DM

PIM-DM configuration

ORSF1 IP QoS Technology

IP QoS Feature Description and configuration

IP QoS overview

Diff-Serv model basis

IP QoS technology basis

IP QoS application on the enterprise network

Classed-based QoS

Hands-on Exercise Guide to IP QoS Feature

Priority re-marking configuration based on complex traffic classification

Interface-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic policing configuration

Classed-based traffic shaping configuration

Congestion avoidance and congestion management configuration

OSW3A Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance

CE series switch runtime maintenance

The contents of maintenance

The precautions of maintenance

The parts replacement of TOR switch

The parts replacement of CE12800 switch

CE series switch System software upgrade

Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch

Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch

Page 207: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 207

ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch

Hands-on Exercise Guide to system software upgrade on CE series switch

Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch

Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch

ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 208: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 208

3.7.4 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE68/CE58) Operation and Maintenance

Training (Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the hardware architecture of CE series data center switch

Describe the data forwarding procedure of CE series data center switch

List the features of CE series data center switch

Describe the application of CE series data center switch

Describe the VRP development and history

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance

OSW3A 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Data Center Network Key technologies

OSW36 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Huawei Data Center Network Solution

OSW33 0.5d Lecture

VRP8 Platform Introduction

OSW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction

OSW31 0.5d Lecture

Page 209: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 209

Describe VRP platform features

Describe VRP8 platform new features

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation

List the VRP8 platform basic commands

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Mange the configuration file on CE switch

Use the FTP function on CE switch

Describe the architecture of data center

Describe the data center development

Describe Huawei data center network solution

Describe FC SAN network basic architecture

Describe FCOE network basic architecture

Describe the FCOE implementation of related technologies

Describe DCB function technical principle

Describe the application in data center network of FCOE

Describe the background of TRILL

Describe the basic concept of TRILL

Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL

Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network

Describe the application of TRILL in modern network

Configure TRILL protocol

Describe the principle of stack technology

Describe the stack technology realization on CE switch

Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR and CE12800 switch

List the procedure of configuration of stack on TOR switch

List the procedure of configuration of stack on CE12800 switch

Describe background of VS technology

Describe the realization of VS technology

Describe the principle of VS technology

Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE switch

Describe the background of VM virtual migration

Describe the technologies for VM virtual migration

Describe the procedure of realization of VM virtual migration

Describe the solution of Huawei data center network implementation

Describe the contents of maintenance of CE series switch

Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE series switch

Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch

Describe the parts replacement of CE12800 series switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on TOR Switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on TOR switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by FTP on CE12800 series switch

Describe the procedure of system software upgrade by Bootrom menu on CE12800 switch

Page 210: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 210

Describe the ISSU software upgrade on CE12800 switch

Training Content

OSW31 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Product Introduction

CE Series Switch product introduction

CE series data center switch product position

CE series data center switch product architecture

CE series data center switch boards and modules

CE series data center switch data forwarding

CE series data center switch product features

CE series data center switch applications

OSW32 VRP8 Platform Introduction

VRP8 platform introduction and operation

Development of VRP and background of VRP8

VRP8 features

VRP8 basic operation

Hands-on Exercise Guide to VRP8 basic operation

Basic commands of VRP8 operation

Configure the remote management function on CE switch

Management of configuration file of CE switch

Basic file operation by FTP on CE switch

OSW33 Huawei Data Center Network Solution

Data center network solution introduction

Overview of data center network

Development of data center network

Huawei data center network solution

OSW36 Data Center Network Key technologies

CE series switch FCOE feature introduction

The development of data center network

FC SAN network overview

FCOE network overview

FCOE working principle

Huawei FCOE network solution

Hands-on Exercise Guide to FCOE feature

FIP Snooping configuration

DCB function configuration

CE series switch TRILL feature introduction

TRILL technology overview

TRILL protocol mechanism

TRILL network data forwarding

TRILL application in network

TRILL basic configuration

Page 211: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 211

Hands-on Exercise Guide to TRILL feature

TRILL basic configuration

TRILL route selection control

TRILL security authentication configuration

CE series switch stack feature introduction

Stack technology overview

The procedure to realize stack

The common applications of stack

Stack system data forwarding and failure switchover

Stack system basic configuration

Hands-on Exercise Guide to stack feature

Establish the stack system on TOR switch

Join the stack system for TOR switch

Establish the stack system on CE12800 switch

CE series switch VS feature introduction

The background of VS

VS technology overview

VS technology principle

VS basic configuration

VS applications in network

nCenter virtual perception introduction

background of VM virtual migration

the technologies for VM virtual migration

the procedure of VM virtual migration realization

nCenter virtual perception implementation solution

OSW3A Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58) Maintenance

CE series switch runtime maintenance

The contents of maintenance

The precautions of maintenance

The parts replacement of TOR switch

The parts replacement of CE12800 switch

CE series switch System software upgrade

Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch

Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch

ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch

Hands-on Exercise Guide to system software upgrade on CE series switch

Upgrade by FTP on TOR switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on TOR switch

Upgrade by FTP on CE12800 switch

Upgrade by BOOTROM menu on CE12800 switch

Page 212: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 212

ISSU upgrade on CE12800 switch

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 213: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 213

3.8 WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs

3.8.1 WLAN Technology Basics Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe IP route process

Describe the means of routing table

Differentiate the route load balance and route backup

Configure static route

Configure default route

Know what VLAN is

Know concepts about VLAN

Configure VLAN basic function

Know the mechanism and configuration of communication between VLANs

Describe what WLAN is

Describe the development process of WLAN technology

List typical application scenarios of WLAN technology

Describe the working frequency band of WLAN and the basic concepts of channel

Describe the rules of the working frequency band and channel in each country

List other technologies related to WLAN

Describe the basic concepts of 802.11

Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN

List Huawei WDS network mode

Describe mesh network mode

Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11

List the advantages of 802.11n

Training Content

OWL0A WLAN Technology Basics

Routing Protocol Foundation

IP route overview

WLAN Technology Basics

OWL0A 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 214: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 214

IP Static route

Static Route and Default Route Hands-on Exercise

Configure static route

Configure default route

VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration

VLAN overview

VLAN basic function

Concepts about VLAN

Mechanism of VLAN Communication

VLAN Basic Principle Hands-on Exercise

VLAN Basic Principle Configuration

WLAN Historical Overview

Introduction to wireless networks

What is WLAN

WLAN development

WLAN applications

WLAN Frequency Bands

Frequency and channel introduction

2.4GHz bands

5GHz bands

Other technology

WLAN Topologies Introduction

Basic elements of IEEE 802.11

WLAN topologies introduction

802.11 Protocol Introduction

802.11a/b/g protocol introduction

802.11n protocol introduction

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 215: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 215

3.8.2 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei WLAN solution

Describe Huawei AC basic performance

List Huawei wireless AP

Describe Huawei AC hardware features

Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture

Install AC6605

Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs

Describe the basic installation of different types APs

List the note during installation

Complete different types APs installation

Describe the WLAN basic component

Use Huawei VRP basic command

Configure Basic Attributes of AC

Upgrade AC and AP

Training Content

OWL1A WLAN Installation and Basic Commissioning Training

Huawei WLAN Product Introduction

Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction

Huawei wireless controller introduction

Huawei WLAN network management system introduction

Huawei wireless Access Point introduction

A Wireless Access Point Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware installation introduction

Outdoor AP hardware installation instruction

AP Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

WLAN Installation and Basic Commissioning Training

OWL1A 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 216: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 216

Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

WLAN Foundation Experiment

Clear AC configuration, reboot

Configure switch VLAN

VRP and Initial Confection Introduction

Huawei VRP introduction

AC initial confection introduction

AC and AP upgrade introduction

The Basic Operation of the AC

Configure AC basic attribute

Configure AP go online

Configure WLAN service-set

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 217: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 217

3.8.3 WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei WLAN solution

Describe Huawei AC basic performance

List Huawei wireless AP

Describe Huawei AC hardware features

Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture

Install AC6605

Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs

Describe the basic installation of different types Aps

List the note during installation

Complete different types APs installation

Describe the WLAN basic component

Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit AP

Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

Outline the typical Application of WLAN

Describe the theory of operations when AC as a L2 switch or gateway

Describe the methods of AP management

Describe the AP boot sequence

Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode

Use Huawei VRP basic command

Configure Basic Attributes of AC

Upgrade AC and AP

List the PoE components

Describe PoE budget

Configure the equipment interface of POE

Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the AC

Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of Huawei WLAN network

WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

OWL1B 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 218: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 218

Configure the basic attribute of AC

List the encryption suites of WLAN

List the authentication methods of WLAN

Configure security-profile

Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight

Configure WLAN business by wizard

Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN

Training Content

OWL1B WLAN Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Huawei WLAN Product Introduction

Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction

Huawei wireless controller introduction

Huawei WLAN network management system introduction

Huawei wireless Access Point introduction

A Wireless Access Point Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware installation introduction

Outdoor AP hardware installation instruction

AP Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

WLAN Foundation Experiment

Clear AC configuration, reboot

Configure switch VLAN

AP Management and CAPWAP Tunnel Introduction

AP Management

AP discovery AC

AP Access Control

VLAN Deployment

AC Application Scenarios

Huawei WLAN Architecture Introduction

Autonomous architecture and Centralized architecture

CAPWAP tunnel introduction

Typical WLAN networking application

AC deployment

VRP and Initial Confection Introduction

Huawei VRP introduction

AC initial confection introduction

AC and AP upgrade introduction

The Basic Operation of the AC

Configure AC basic attribute

Configure AP go online

Page 219: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 219

Configure WLAN service-set

PoE Technology Introduction

PoE terminology

PoE Function

PoE configuration

AC Confection Flow Chart

WLAN Features Supported by the AC

WLAN configuration roadmap

WLAN Access Security

WLAN security overview

WLAN encryption suites

WLAN authentication methods

WLAN security configuration

eSight WLAN Management

Basic Concepts and Functions of WLAN

WLAN operation

WLAN maintenance tasks

WLAN Access Security Configure

Configure WEP authentication

Configure WPA PSK authentication

Configure WPA dot1X authentication

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 220: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 220

3.8.4 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the Basic O&M

Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei WLAN solution

Describe Huawei AC basic performance

List Huawei wireless AP

Describe Huawei AC hardware features

Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture

Install AC6605

Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs

Describe the basic installation of different types Aps

List the note during installation

Complete different types APs installation

Describe the WLAN basic component

Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit AP

Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

Outline the typical Application of WLAN

Describe the theory of operations when AC as a L2 switch or gateway

Describe the methods of AP management

Describe the AP boot sequence

Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode

Use Huawei VRP basic command

Configure Basic Attributes of AC

Upgrade AC and AP

List the PoE components

Describe PoE budget

Configure the equipment interface of POE

Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the AC

WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training

OWL11 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 221: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 221

Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of Huawei WLAN network

Configure the basic attribute of AC

List the encryption suites of WLAN

List the authentication methods of WLAN

Configure security-profile

Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight

Configure WLAN business by wizard

Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN

Describe the basic function of AC6605 LSW side

Configure the AC LSW's common functions

Describe the importance of WLAN reliability

List the method of WLAN reliability

Configure WLAN dual-link backup

Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming

Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming

Configure WLAN roaming

Describe the contents of user authority management

Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and White list

Configure user group authorization

Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment scenarios

Describe the Fresnel Zone

Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics

Describe Huawei outdoor AP

List antennas characteristic

Describe how to select antennas

Describe WDS basic concept

List WDS application scenarios

Describe WDS setup

Configure WDS

Configure 802.11n basic

Describe the principle of WLAN user load balance

Configure Huawei WLAN load balance

Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the AC6605

Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile

Describe eSight WLAN management advance features

Use eSight batch operate AP

Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis

Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner

Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan

List the common fault of WLAN

Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN

Page 222: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 222

Training Content

WL11 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training

Huawei WLAN Product Introduction

Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction

Huawei wireless controller introduction

Huawei WLAN network management system introduction

Huawei wireless Access Point introduction

A Wireless Access Point Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware installation introduction

Outdoor AP hardware installation instruction

AP Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

WLAN Foundation Experiment

Clear AC configuration, reboot

Configure switch VLAN

AP Management and CAPWAP Tunnel Introduction

AP Management

AP discovery AC

AP Access Control

VLAN Deployment

AC Application Scenarios

Huawei WLAN Architecture Introduction

Autonomous architecture and Centralized architecture

CAPWAP tunnel introduction

Typical WLAN networking application

AC deployment

VRP and Initial Confection Introduction

Huawei VRP introduction

AC initial configuration introduction

AC and AP upgrade introduction

The Basic Operation of the AC

Configure AC basic attribute

Configure AP go online

Configure WLAN service-set

PoE Technology Introduction

PoE terminology

PoE Function

PoE configuration

AC Confection Flow Chart

WLAN Features supported by the AC

Page 223: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 223

WLAN configuration roadmap

WLAN Access Security

WLAN security overview

WLAN encryption suites

WLAN authentication methods

WLAN security configuration

eSight WLAN Management

Basic Concepts and Functions of WLAN

WLAN operation

WLAN maintenance tasks

WLAN Access Security Configure

Configure WEP authentication

Configure WPA PSK authentication

Configure WPA dot1X authentication

The Basic Function of LSW

AC6605 logical architecture

The LSW features of the AC6605

The basic configuration of LSW

WLAN Reliability Introduction

WLAN reliability technology

WLAN reliability overview

The method of WLAN reliability

AP redundancy: automatically adjust the power

Link redundancy: link aggregation

Equipment redundancy: AC dual-link backup

Wireless Network Roaming Technology

Basic concept of roaming

Layer 2 and layer 3 roaming

Application scenarios and configuration of Huawei roaming

WLAN User Authority Management

User isolation and ACL

STA blacklist and white list

WLAN High-level Characteristic Configuration

Initialization configuration

Configure link aggregation and route

Configure user authority management

Configure AC dual-link backup

Configure WLAN roaming

Huawei Outdoor AP Deployment

WLAN deployment scenarios

Fresnel Zone introduction

Radio frequency mathematics

Page 224: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 224

Outdoor AP and Antennas Introduction

Huawei outdoor AP introduction

Huawei antennas introduction

Antenna model selection

Huawei WDS Introduction

WDS Overview

WDS application scenarios

WDS Setup

WDS configuration example

802.11N and Load Balance

802.11N principle and configuration

WLAN load balance

Configure WDS

Configure WDS wireless bridge

WLAN QOS Configuration

WLAN QoS overview

WMM principle and configuration

Radio QoS Policy : WMM and EDCA

Traffic-profile: 802.1p mapping, User Priority and CAR

eSight WLAN Advance Management

eSight advance features

System log management and configuration

SNMP configuration

Use eSight batch operate AP

Wireless hot map analysis

Huawei WLAN Planner Introduction

The basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner

Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan

WLAN Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting basic method introduction

Common fault troubleshooting of WLAN

Troubleshooting case

WLAN Maintenance and Optimization Experiment

Configure QOS optimization

Configure eSight

Use Huawei WLAN planner

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 225: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 225

3.8.5 Chassis Switches WLAN Features (ACU) Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA(HCDA) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei WLAN solution

Describe Huawei AC basic performance

List Huawei wireless AP

Describe the ACU Concept and Function

Describe the ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700 Relationship

Describe the ACU Hardware Structure

Installing/Replacing ACU

Describe the models and usage scenarios of Huawei APs

Describe the basic installation of different types Aps

List the note during installation

Complete different types APs installation

Describe the WLAN basic component

Differentiate the different between Fat AP and Fit AP

Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

Outline the typical Application of WLAN

Describe the theory of operations when AC as a L2 switch or gateway

Describe the methods of AP management

Describe the AP boot sequence

Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode

Use Huawei VRP basic command

Configure Basic Attributes of AC

Upgrade AC and AP

List the PoE components

Describe PoE budget

Configure the equipment interface of POE

Describe the WLAN Features Supported by the AC

ACU Operation and Maintenance Training

OWL21 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 226: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 226

Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of Huawei WLAN network

Configure the basic attribute of AC

List the encryption suites of WLAN

List the authentication methods of WLAN

Configure security-profile

Describe the WLAN basic functions of eSight

Configure WLAN business by wizard

Use eSight manage and maintain WLAN

Describe the basic function of ACU LSW side

Configure the AC LSW's common functions

Describe the importance of WLAN reliability

List the method of WLAN reliability

Configure WLAN dual-link backup

Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming

Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming

Configure WLAN roaming

Describe the contents of user authority management

Configure user isolation, ACL, STA blacklist and White list

Configure user group authorization

Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment scenarios

Describe the Fresnel Zone

Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics

Describe Huawei outdoor AP

List antennas characteristic

Describe how to select antennas

Describe WDS basic concept

List WDS application scenarios

Describe WDS setup

Configure WDS

Configure 802.11n basic

Describe the principle of WLAN user load balance

Configure Huawei WLAN load balance

Describe WLAN QoS features supported by the ACU

Configure of wmm-profile and traffic-profile

Describe eSight WLAN management advance features

Use eSight batch operate AP

Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis

Describe the basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner

Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan

List the common fault of WLAN

Describe common fault troubleshooting of WLAN

Page 227: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 227

Training Content

OWL21 WLAN Operation and Maintenance Training

Huawei WLAN Product Introduction

Huawei WLAN equipment solution introduction

Huawei wireless controller introduction

Huawei WLAN network management system introduction

Huawei wireless Access Point introduction

ACU Overview and Installing Introduction

ACU Overview

ACU and S9300&S7700&S9700 Relationship

ACU Hardware Structure Introduction

Installing/Replacing ACU Steps

AP Hardware and Installation Introduction

Indoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

Outdoor AP Hardware Installation Instruction

WLAN Foundation Experiment

Clear AC configuration, reboot

Configure switch VLAN

AP Management and CAPWAP Tunnel Introduction

AP Management

AP discovery AC

AP Access Control

VLAN Deployment

AC Application Scenarios

Huawei WLAN Architecture Introduction

Autonomous architecture and Centralized architecture

CAPWAP tunnel introduction

Typical WLAN networking application

AC deployment

VRP and ACU Initial Confection Introduction

Huawei VRP introduction

ACU initial configuration introduction

ACU and AP upgrade introduction

The Basic Operation of the ACU

Configure ACU basic attribute

Configure AP go online

Configure WLAN service-set

PoE Technology Introduction

PoE terminology

PoE Function

PoE configuration

Page 228: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 228

ACU Confection Flow Chart

WLAN Features supported by the ACU

WLAN configuration roadmap

WLAN Access Security

WLAN security overview

WLAN encryption suites

WLAN authentication methods

WLAN security configuration

eSight WLAN Management

Basic Concepts and Functions of WLAN

WLAN operation

WLAN maintenance tasks

WLAN Access Security Configure

Configure WEP authentication

Configure WPA PSK authentication

Configure WPA dot1X authentication

The Basic Function of Chassis Switch

Chassis Switch logical architecture

The Chassis Switch features of the ACU

The basic configuration of Chassis Switch

WLAN Reliability Introduction

WLAN reliability technology

WLAN reliability overview

The method of WLAN reliability

AP redundancy: automatically adjust the power

Link redundancy: link aggregation

Equipment redundancy: AC dual-link backup

Wireless Network Roaming Technology

Basic concept of roaming

Layer 2 and layer 3 roaming

Application scenarios and configuration of Huawei roaming

WLAN User Authority Management

User isolation and ACL

STA blacklist and white list

WLAN High-level Characteristic Configuration

Initialization configuration

Configure link aggregation and route

Configure user authority management

Configure AC dual-link backup

Configure WLAN roaming

Huawei Outdoor AP Deployment

WLAN deployment scenarios

Page 229: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 229

Fresnel Zone introduction

Radio frequency mathematics

Outdoor AP and Antennas Introduction

Huawei outdoor AP introduction

Huawei antennas introduction

Antenna model selection

Huawei WDS Introduction

WDS Overview

WDS application scenarios

WDS Setup

WDS configuration example

802.11N and Load Balance

802.11N principle and configuration

WLAN load balance

Configure WDS

Configure WDS wireless bridge

WLAN QOS Configuration

WLAN QoS overview

WMM principle and configuration

Radio QoS Policy : WMM and EDCA

Traffic-profile: 802.1p mapping, User Priority and CAR

eSight WLAN Advance Management

eSight advance features

System log management and configuration

SNMP configuration

Use eSight batch operate AP

Wireless hot map analysis

Huawei WLAN Planner Introduction

The basic Characteristics of the WLAN planner

Use the WLAN planner tool to do a WLAN plan

WLAN Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting basic method introduction

Common fault troubleshooting of WLAN

Troubleshooting case

WLAN Maintenance and Optimization Experiment

Configure QOS optimization

Configure eSight

Use Huawei WLAN planner

Duration

5 working days

Page 230: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 230

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 231: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 231

3.8.6 WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic principles of WLAN designing

Describe the basic process of WLAN designing

List Huawei WLAN devices

Differentiate the application features of different network modes

Use WLAN planner to design WLAN

Describe the application features of small and medium-sized enterprise WLAN

List the common used WLAN deployment modes of small and medium-sized enterprise

Plan the VLAN\route\channel of small and medium-sized enterprise WLAN

Describe the application features of large-scale enterprise WLAN

List the common used WLAN deployment modes of large-scale enterprise

Design WLAN HA feature

Design WLAN voice

Design WLAN expandability feature

Design WLAN advanced security feature

Design outdoor WLAN

Estimate the advantages and disadvantages of WLAN Network Design approach

List security threat types of WLAN

Describe the development process of encryption techniques

Describe the development of authentication techniques

Use protocol analyzer software

Describe authentication architecture of WPA

Describe AAA basic principle

Configure WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)

Configure Radius filter attribute and management authority between users

List extended security technology that Huawei WLAN supports

WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization

OWL0E 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise,

Case-study

Page 232: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 232

Configure various security authentication techniques in AC

Describe scenarios of Huawei outdoor WLAN deployment

List Huawei outdoor AP models and their features

Describe dBi and antenna pattern

Choose the right outdoor antenna

Describe the basic concepts of WDS

List the common applications of WDS

Use WDS configuration command

List the basic protocols for wireless network management

Use NTP protocol and syslog protocol to configure time of AC

Describe the principle of SNMP protocol

Configure the SNMP parameters of AC

Use eSight to discover devices

Use eSight wizard to configure WLAN

Use eSight to detect WLAN devices

Use eSight to manage AP

Configure WLAN wireless service-set

Use eSight to do wireless hot map analysis

Training Content

OWL0E WLAN Planning, Design and Optimization

WLAN Network Design Overview

Basic principle of WLAN Network Design

Basic designing process of WLAN network

WLAN products and selection

CAPWAP introduction and WLAN network deploying modes comparing

WLAN planner introduction

Small and Medium-sized Enterprise WLAN Network Design

Small and medium-sized enterprise WLAN network features

Common used WLAN network topologies of small and medium-sized enterprise

WLAN VLAN routing designing for small and medium-sized enterprise

WLAN Security designing for small and medium-sized enterprise

Large-scale Enterprise WLAN Network Design

Large-scale enterprise WLAN network features

WLAN HA designing: redundancy and load balance

WLAN voice Network Design: QoS and roaming

Extended WLAN feature designing: VLAN, SSID designing

Advanced WLAN security feature: customer authentication management

Outdoor WLAN Network Design: WDS network

WLAN Network Design Cases Analysis

Network deployment modes

VLAN and SSID designing

Page 233: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 233

Security authentication

HA and QoS

WLAN Security Overview

WLAN security threat

Development process of encryption techniques

Development process of authentication techniques

Wireless WIPS, WIDS introduction

protocol analyzer software

WPA Enterprise Introduction and Configuration

Authentication architecture of WPA

AAA basic principle

Configuration cases of WPA dot1X(EAP-PEAP)

Radius filter attribute and user authentication management

Extended security, authentication techniques

SSID hiding

Wireless customer isolation strategy

PPPOE authentication

MAC authentication

Web portal authentication achievement

Hands-on Exercises Guide to WLAN security

Configure WLAN authentication techniques: open psk dot1x

Huawei Outdoor AP Deployment

WLAN outdoor deployment scenarios

Fresnel Zone Introduction

Radio Frequency Mathematics

Huawei WLAN Devices and Antenna Selection

Outdoor AP introduction

Outdoor AP installation introduction

Antenna introduction and selection

Huawei WDS Principle and Configuration

Basic concept of WDS and WDS application

AP planning of WDS

Simple bridge connection of WDS network

Complex bridge connection of WDS network

Hands-on Exercises Guide to WDS

Configure Huawei WDS wireless bridge connection feature

WLAN Network Management Overview

The necessity of WLAN network management

NTP overview

Syslog overview

SNMP overview

eSight Network Basic Management Feature

Page 234: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 234

Devices discovery

Configure WLAN by Wizard

AP checking and customer checking

eSight Network Advanced Management Feature

Batch management of AP

Configure WLAN manually use eSight

WLAN positioning and hot map analysis

Troubleshooting

Hands-on Exercises Guide to eSight Manage WLAN

eSight basic configuration

eSight configure with wizard

eSight configuration manually

AP management and hot map analysis

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 235: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 235

3.9 MSCG(ME60) Training Programs

3.9.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

A basic understanding of data communication

A general understanding of telecom network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe ME60 product hardware structure

Describe ME60-X series products hardware structure

Describe ME60 product feature

Describe the VRP system structure

Describe the basic configuration and commands

Upgrade VRP system

Configure the VRP user logging authentication

Configure FTP service

Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP system

Describe basic BRAS technologies

Describe ME60 product routine maintenance

Training Content

ODA02 VRP System Operation

VRP Troubleshooting Basics

Fault classification and common disposal method

ME60 Product Routine Maintenance

ODB04 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 Product Introduction

ODB01 0.5d Lecture, LVC

VRP System Operation

ODA02 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 236: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 236

Common diagnose tools and command

Basic idea of fault diagnose and examples

VRP System Administration Practice Guide

VRP system administration practice

VRP Basic Configuration Practice Guide

VRP basic configuration practice

VRP Basic Configuration Manual

Building configuration environment

VRP configuration basis

ODB01 ME60 Product Introduction

ME60 Product Hardware Description Manual

ME60 hardware architecture

ME60 board types

ME60 board functions

ODB04 ME60 Product Routine Maintenance

ME60 Product Basic Maintenance Manual

Indicator Introduction

Introduction to Routine Maintenance Items

Commands for Routine Maintenance

ME60 Product Hardware Troubleshooting Manual

Analyze Slave MPU Cannot Be Registered

Analyze LPU or SFU Cannot Be Registered

Analyze Sub card Cannot Be Registered

Analyze Troubleshooting Case

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 237: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 237

3.9.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

ME60 product 2nd line maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

At least one year of experience in the operation or maintenance of data communication

equipment

A general understanding of TCP/IP

ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ODB17 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 QoS Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ODB09 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 Multicast Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ODB08 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 L2TP Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ODB07 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 BRAS Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ODB06 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 Routing Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ODB05 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ME60 Product Introduction

ODB01 0.5d Lecture, LVC

Page 238: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 238

A general understanding of routing basics

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe ME60 product hardware structure

Describe ME60-X series products hardware structure

Describe ME60 product feature

Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features

Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features

Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol features

Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features

Describe RADIUS protocol principle

Describe DHCP protocol principle

Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle

Describe ME60 PPP service features and realization

Describe ME60 IP service features and realization

Describe ME60 leased line service feature and realization

Describe ME60 BRAS service features troubleshooting

Configure ME60 PPP service features

Configure ME60 IP service features

Configure ME60 leased line service feature

Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization

Configure ME60 L2TP feature

Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization

Configure ME60 QoS feature

Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization

Configure ME60 RUI feature

Training Content

ODB01 ME60 Product Introduction

ME60 Product Hardware Description Manual

ME60 hardware architecture

ME60 board types

ME60 board functions

ODB05 ME60 Routing Features Operation and Troubleshooting

Configure OSPF on BRAS Product Manual

OSPF basic concept

OSPF neighbor and packets

OSPF network types

OSPF LSA

OSPF special area

OSPF single-area configuration

OSPF multi-area configuration

Page 239: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 239

OSPF route aggregation configuration

Area authentication configuration

Configure IS-IS on BRAS Product Manual

Overview of IS-IS routing protocol

Principle of IS-IS routing protocol

Comparing IS-IS and OSPF

IS-IS single-area configuration

IS-IS multi-area configuration

IS-IS layering configuration

IS-IS route import and convergence configuration

ODB06 ME60 BRAS Features Operation and Troubleshooting

Radius Protocol Principle Manual

RADIUS overview

RADIUS authentication principle

RADIUS accounting principle

DHCP Protocol Principle Manual

Fundamentals of DHCP

DHCP extensible features

DHCP configuration on BRAS

PPP and PPPoE Protocol Principle Manual

PPP principle and configuration

PPPoE principle and configuration

ME60 PPP Service Features and Realization Manual

Function of BRAS service related components

ME60 PPP service implementation

ME60 PPP service configuration

ME60 IP Service Features and Realization Manual

Function of BRAS service related components

ME60 IP service principle

ME60 IP service configuration

ME60 BRAS Service Features Troubleshooting Manual

PPP service troubleshooting

IP service troubleshooting

Troubleshooting case

ME60 Leased Line Service Feature and Realization Manual

Introduction to leased line service

Leased line service configuration on ME60

Layer 2 leased line Service configuration

Layer 3 leased line Service configuration

ODB07 ME60 L2TP Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ME60 L2TP Feature and Realization Manual

Principle of L2TP VPN

Page 240: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 240

L2TP VPN configuration on ME60

LAC configuration

LNS configuration

ODB08 ME60 Multicast Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ME60 Multicast Feature and Realization Manual

IGMP principle and implementation

PIM SM principle and implementation

PIM SSM principle and implementation

PIM-SM basic configuration

RPT-to-SPT switchover configuration

ODB09 ME60 QoS Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ME60 QoS Feature and Realization Manual

ME60 IP QoS feature and realization

ME60 HQoS feature and realization

Traffic policing configuration

QoS scheduling configuration

Class-based QoS configuration

ODB17 ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features Operation and Troubleshooting

ME60 RUI Feature and Realization Manual

Overview of ME60 RUI feature

Principle of ME60 RUI feature

Configuration of ME60 RUI feature

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 241: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 241

3.9.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training

Training Path

Target Audience

ME60 product IPTV service maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Attended ”ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training”

A good understanding of datacom network protocols

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and realization

Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature and realization

Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization

Describe ME60 IPTV solution features

Describe IPTV bear network multicast deployment solutions

Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature

Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature

Training Content

ODB18 ME60 IPTV Service Features

ME60 Multicast Feature and Realization

IGMP principle and implementation

PIM SM principle and implementation

PIM SSM principle and implementation

ME60 MQE Feature and Realization

FCC implementation principles and configuration

RET implementation principles and configuration

Video monitoring implementation principles and configuration

MQE deployment

ME60 BAS-Side Multicast Feature and Realization

BAS-Side multicast overview

Introduction to multicast QoS and CAC

BAS-Side multicast configuration example

BAS-Side multicast application scenario

ME60 IPTV Solution Overview

Background to IPTV

ME60 IPTV Service Features

ODB18 4d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 242: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 242

Typical IPTV components and their functions

Typical IPTV network Architecture

IPTV End-to-End service process

IPTV solution on the Huawei ME60

ME60 Multicast Hot-Backup Features and Realization

ME60 multicast hot-backup feature applications

ME60 multicast hot-backup feature principle

ME60 multicast hot-backup feature implementation

ME60 BAS-Side Multicast Feature Practice Guide

ME60 BAS-Side multicast configuration

ME60 Multicast Hot-Backup Features Practice Guide

ME60 multicast hot-backup configuration

Design and Deployment of Multicast Service on MAN

Multicast Design and Planning in MAN

Layer 2 Multicast Design and Planning in MAN

Duration

4 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 243: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 243

3.9.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training

Training Path

Target Audience

ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer or expert from technical supporting team

Prerequisites

Attended “ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training”

A good understanding of datacom network protocols

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 leased line features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 multicast features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting

Training Content

ODB20 ME60 Products Troubleshooting

ME60 Multicast Features Troubleshooting Manual

ME60 BAS-Side multicast features troubleshooting

ME60 BAS-Side multicast configuration

ME60 PPPoE Service Features Troubleshooting Manual

ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting

ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting practice

ME60 IPoE Service Features Troubleshooting Manual

ME60 DHCP and web authentication troubleshooting

ME60 DHCP and web authentication troubleshooting practice

ME60 Leased Line Service Features Troubleshooting Manual

ME60 Leased Line features troubleshooting

ME60 Leased Line features troubleshooting practice

ME60 QoS Features Troubleshooting Manual

ME60 QoS troubleshooting

ME60 QoS features troubleshooting practice

Duration

5 working days

ME60 Products Troubleshooting

ODB20 5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 244: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 244

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 245: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 245

3.9.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training

Training Path

Target Audience

U2000 operator and maintainer

IP network routine monitor and maintainer

Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of Huawei ME60 product

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the architecture and main features of U2000

Describe the directory structure of U2000

List the main functions of U2000

Describe the basic concepts in alarm and performance management of U2000

Perform the browse and setting operation for alarm

Perform the basic response operation for common alarm events

Perform the browse and setting operation for performance events

Manage ME60 by using U2000

Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000

Training Content

ODM06 iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration

iManager U2000 PPPoE Service Deployment

Configure PPPoEoVLAN service on ME60 by using U2000

ONU01 U2000 System Introduction

iManager U2000 System Introduction

The architecture and main features of U2000

U2000 Alarm and Performance Management

ONU02 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on Exercise

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01 0.5d Lecture, Demonstration

iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration

ODM06 1d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 246: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 246

The directory structure of U2000

The main functions of U2000

ONU02 U2000 Alarm and Performance Management

iManager U2000 Fault Management

Overview of the fault management

Monitoring of the fault alarm

Processing of the fault alarm

Notification of the fault alarm

Dumping of the fault and event

iManager U2000 Performance Management

Overview of the performance management

Monitoring equipment performance

Monitoring VPN performance

Dumping performance data

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 247: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 247

3.10 PTN Products Training Programs

3.10.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

PTN series installation and commissioning engineer

Prerequisites

Having an overview of PTN products applications

Having an overview of telecommunications

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the precautions

Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the precautions

Training Content

ODP03 PTN Products Hardware Description

PTN 3900&1900 Hardware Description

Networking applications of the PTN products

System structure of the PTN products

Main functions of the boards used on the PTN products

System protection schemes of the PTN products

PTN 950&910 Hardware Description

PTN 950&910 application

PTN 950&910 Chassis

PTN 950&910 boards

ODP05 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning

PTN 3900&1900 Installation Guide

Cabinet installation

PTN 3900 sub-rack installation

PTN Products Installation and Commissioning

ODP05 1d Lecture, Demonstration

PTN Products Hardware Description

ODP03 1d Lecture, Demonstration

Page 248: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 248

PTN 1900 sub-rack installation

PTN 950&910 Installation Guide

Precautions of installation

PTN 950 installation

PTN 910 installation

Checking process after installation

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 249: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 249

3.10.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

PTN series 1st line /field maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Having an overview of PTN products applications

Having an overview of telecommunications

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site maintenance

Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance

Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting

Describe 950&910 troubleshooting

Describe PTN Products routine maintenance

Describe the tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC

Training Content

ODP03 PTN Products Hardware Description

PTN 3900&1900 Hardware Description

Networking applications of the PTN products

System structure of the PTN products

Main functions of the boards used on the PTN products

System protection schemes of the PTN products

PTN 950&910 Hardware Description

PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC

ODP07 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

PTN Products Field Maintenance

ODP06 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

PTN Products Hardware Description

ODP03 1d Lecture, Demo

Page 250: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 250

PTN 950&910 application

PTN 950&910 Chassis

PTN 950&910 boards

ODP06 PTN Products Field Maintenance

PTN 3900&1900 On-Site Maintenance

Routine maintenance in NMS Center

On-site routine maintenance

Routine maintenance of Spare Parts

PTN 950&910&912 On-site Maintenance

Understand the meanings of PTN 950&910&912 indicators

ODP07 PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC

PTN Products Routine Maintenance

Tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC.

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 251: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 251

3.10.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer

PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting

ODP13 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

PTN Products Service Configuration

ODP11 2d Hands-on exercise, Demo

PTN Products Basic Configuration

ODP10 1d Hands-on exercise, Demo

PTN Products Public Features

ODP09 2d Lecture, Demo

PTN Products Public Principle

ODP08 2d Lecture

PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC

ODP07 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

PTN Products Features Description

ODP04 1d Lecture

PTN Products Hardware Description

ODP03 1d Lecture, Demo

Page 252: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 252

Prerequisites

Having an overview of PTN products applications

Having an overview of telecommunications

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe TCP&IP basic concepts

Describe Ethernet basic principle

Describe basic IP routing protocol works

Describe MPLS basic concepts

Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature

Describe PTN 950&910 software feature

Describe PTN products PWE3 technology

Describe PTN products control plane

Describe PTN products QoS technology

Describe PTN products protection technology

Describe PTN products packet clock technology

Configure PTN products basic parameters

Configure PTN products interfaces

Configure PTN products control plane

Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel

Configure PTN products CES service

Configure PTN products ATM service

Configure PTN products E-Line service

Configure PTN products E-LAN service

Configure PTN products E-AGGR service

Describe PTN Products routine maintenance

Describe the tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC

Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting process

Training Content

ODP03 PTN Products Hardware Description

PTN 3900&1900 Hardware Description

Networking applications of the PTN products

System structure of the PTN products

Main functions of the boards used on the PTN products

System protection schemes of the PTN products

PTN 950&910 Hardware Description

PTN 950&910 application

PTN 950&910 Chassis

Page 253: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 253

PTN 950&910 boards

ODP04 PTN Products Features Description

PTN 3900&1900 Feature Description

PTN 3900&1900 applications

PTN 3900&1900 protection features

PTN 3900&1900 QoS features

PTN 3900&1900 OAM features

PTN 3900&1900 synchronization features

PTN 3900&1900 In-band DCN features

PTN 950&910 Feature Description

Service type of PTN 950&910

Microwave feature of PTN 950&910

PTN 950&910 protection, QoS, OAM, Synchronization, xDSL features etc.

ODP07 PTN Products Routine Maintenance in NOC

PTN Products Routine Maintenance

Tools and method of routine maintenance in NOC.

ODP08 PTN Products Public Principle

TCP-IP Fundamental

TCP/IP and OSI Reference Model

Function of layers of TCP/IP

Describe classification of IP addresses

Basic principle of IP routing

Ethernet Technology

Ethernet physical layer

Ethernet data link layer

VLAN technology and its applications

MSTP technology and its applications

IP Routing Basic

What is router and route

Classification of routing protocols

How IS-IS routing protocol works

MPLS Basic

MPLS concepts

How LSP is setup and how MPLS forward packets

Common ways of MPLS troubleshooting

MPLS OAM concepts and applications

ODP09 PTN Products Public Features

PTN PWE3 Technology

Basic concepts of PWE3

How TDM service is emulated by PWE3

How ATM service is emulated by PWE3

How Ethernet service is emulated by PWE3

Page 254: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 254

Typical applications of different service type

PTN Control Plane Introduction

Four elements of MPLS TE

How IS-IS TE distribute the TE information

How the TE path is calculated

How RSVP-TE works

Basic principle of LDP

PTN QoS Technology

QoS model

QoS basic concept

ATM QoS

Concepts of the HQoS

QoS typical application in PTN network

PTN Protection Technology

MPLS APS and MPLS FRR protection

LMSP protection

Ethernet LAG protection

E1-link protection

PTN Packet Clock Technology

Necessity of synchronization on IP network

Principle of ACR/TOP

Principle of synchronization Ethernet

IEEE 1588v2 principle

ODP10 PTN Products Basic Configuration

PTN Products Basic Configuration

Starting U2000

Creating network using U2000

PTN Products Interface Configuration

Configuration flow of SDH interface

SDH interface configuration using T2000

Parameters of SDH interface

PTN Control Plane Configuration

Basic configuration of Control plane

IS-IS configuration process

LDP configuration process

RSVP configuration process

Static route configuration process

PTN Tunnel Configuration

Dynamic MPLS Tunnel Configuration

Static MPLS Tunnel Configuration

PTN Basic Configuration Practice

U2000 basic operation through practice

Page 255: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 255

Interface configuration

Tunnel configuration

ODP11 PTN Products Service Configuration

PTN PWE3 Service Configuration

Using trail function to configure CES service

CES service configuration process based on per-NE basis

E-Line service configuration

E-Line service related parameters

Using trail function to configure ATM service

ATM service configuration process based on per-NE basis

PTN E-LAN Service Configuration

E-LAN service configuration

E-LAN service related parameters

ODP13 PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting

PTN Products Troubleshooting Basic

Fault handing flow

Familiar with methods of analyzing and locating faults

Regular operations for troubleshooting

Software package loading & diffusion

Duration

10 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 256: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 256

3.10.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer

Prerequisites

Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Configure PTN products QoS features

Configure PTN products protection

Deploy PTN products integrated services

Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting process

Describe PTN products alarm and performance analysis

Describe PTN products common troubleshooting sase

Locate and eliminate PTN products faults

Training Content

ODP12 PTN Products Advanced Configuration

PTN Products Protection Configuration

MPLS APS protection configuring process

MPLS FRR protection configuring process

Ethernet LAG configuring process

PTN Products QoS Configuration

Creating a DiffServ Domain

Creating the Service WRED Policy

Creating the WFQ Scheduling Policy

PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting

ODP14 2.5d Lecture, Case-study

PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting

ODP13 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

PTN Products Advanced Configuration

ODP12 2d Hands-on exercise, Demo

Page 257: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 257

Creating the Port Policy

Creating the V-UNI Ingress Policy

Creating the V-UNI Egress Policy

Creating the PW Policy

Creating the QinQ Policy

Configuring the ATM CoS Mapping

Creating the ATM Policy

PTN Products Integrated Service Deployment

End-to-end CES service configuration

End-to-end ATM service configuration

End-to-end E-Line service configuration

End-to-end E-LAN service configuration

End-to-end E-Aggr service configuration

ODP13 PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting

PTN Products Troubleshooting Basic

Fault handing flow

Familiar with methods of analyzing and locating faults

Regular operations for troubleshooting

Software package loading & diffusion

ODP14 PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting

PTN Products Alarm and Performance Analysis

PTN Products Alarm and Performance Analysis

PTN Products Troubleshooting Case Study

DCN Communication Faults

Operation Fails

Interconnection Faults

Service Faults

PTN Products Troubleshooting Practice Guide

Network Topology and Parameter Settings

Troubleshooting of Faults of the NMS and DCN

Troubleshooting of Control Plane Faults

Tunnel Fault Troubleshooting

CES Service Troubleshooting

Ethernet Service Troubleshooting

ATM Service Troubleshooting

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 4, Max 12

Page 258: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 258

3.10.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training

Training Path

Target Audience

PTN series network planning and design engineer

Prerequisites

Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the PTN network planning process

Collect the network requirements information

Plan the PTN network layers

Plan the PTN network services

Plan the PTN network management and DCN

Plan the equipment types according to the network requirement

Plan the PTN equipment boards

Plan the PTN network protections

Plan the PTN network synchronization

Plan the PTN network QoS

Design the PTN network layers

Design the PTN network slots allocation

Design the PTN equipment parameters

Design the MPLS tunnel parameters

Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services parameters

Training Content

ODP15 PTN Network Planning and Design

PTN Network Planning and Design Overview

PTN Network Planning and Design Overview

PTN Network Planning -- Products Specifications

Products Specifications

PTN Network Planning -- Requirements Collection

Requirements Collection

PTN Network Planning -- Topology and Hardware Planning

Topology and Hardware Planning

PTN Network Planning -- NM and DCN Planning

PTN Network Planning and Design

ODP15 3d Lecture, Case-study

Page 259: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 259

NM and DCN Planning

PTN Network Planning -- NE Parameters Planning

NE Parameters Planning

PTN Network Planning -- Service Bandwidth Analysis

Service Bandwidth Analysis

PTN Network Planning -- Service and Tunnel Planning

Service and Tunnel Planning

PTN Network Planning -- QoS Planning

QoS Planning

PTN Network Planning -- Protection Planning

Protection Planning

PTN Network Planning -- OAM Planning

OAM Planning

PTN Network Planning -- Synchronization Planning

Synchronization Planning

PTN Network Planning -- Case Research

Case Research

PTN Network Design

PTN Network Design Overview

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 4, Max 12

Page 260: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 260

3.11 Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training

Programs

3.11.1 eSight Enterprise NM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of network management

Describe the network management functions

Describe the network management component

Describe the enterprise network overview

Describe the basic functions of eSight

Describe the networking mode of eSight system

Describe eSight related indicators Describe topology management

Describe the steps of accessing a resource

Describe about physical resource management functions

Use link resource management functions

Use electronic label management features

Use about NE Explorer Describe

Describes the monitoring network alarm steps

Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features

Describes the setting alarm mask steps

Describes the remote alarm notification procedure

Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration files

Describe common operations for managing NE configuration files

Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration files

Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up parameters

eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and Maintenance

1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1A

Page 261: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 261

Training Content

ONM1A eSight Enterprise NM Junior Operation and Maintenance

Basic Principles of IP Network Management

The basic concepts of network management

Network management functions

Network management component

eSight Product Introduction

Enterprise network overview

The basic functions of eSight

The networking mode of eSight system

The related indicators of eSight

eSight Network Resource Management

Topology Management

Accessing a Resource

Creating a Subnet

Creating an NE

Physical Resource Management

Link Management

Electronic Labels Management

NE Explorer

eSight Network Fault Management

Fault Management

Monitoring Alarms

Alarm Analysis

Setting Alarm Masking

Setting Remote Alarm Notifications

eSight Network Performance Management

Basic Concepts of Performance Management

Performance Monitoring Process

Browsing Performance Monitoring Data

eSight Configuration File Management

Backing Up NE Configuration Files

Managing NE Configuration Files

Restoring NE Configuration Files

Setting FTP and Backing Up Parameters

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 262: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 262

3.11.2 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training (Including the

Basic O&M Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of network management

Describe the network management functions

Describe the network management component

Describe the enterprise network overview

Describe the basic functions of eSight

Describe the networking mode of eSight system

Describe eSight related indicators

Describe the installation profile

Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps

Master eSight license function and application

Describe the user authority control and managed domain management of eSight

Describe topology management

Describe the steps of accessing a resource

Describe about physical resource management functions

Use link resource management functions

Use electronic label management features

Use about NE Explorer

Describes the monitoring network alarm steps

Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features

Describes the setting alarm mask steps

Describes the remote alarm notification procedure

Describes the basic concepts of performance management

Describes the performance monitoring process

eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance

ONM11 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 263: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 263

Describes the ways to browsing performance monitoring data

Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration files

Describe common operations for managing NE configuration files

Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration files

Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing up parameters

Describe an overview of the functions provided by the smart configuration tool

Describe operation steps of the Deployment by template

Describe operation steps of the Deployment by plan sheet

Describe the functions of Deployment record management

Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump

Describe querying logs

Describe Lower-Layer NMS

Describe licenses management

Describe backing up and restoring the database

Describe NE packages management

Training Content

ONM11 eSight Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance Training

Basic Principles of IP Network Management

The basic concepts of network management

Network management functions

Network management component

eSight Product Introduction

Enterprise network overview

The basic functions of eSight

The networking mode of eSight system

The related indicators of eSight

eSight Software Installation Guide

Installation profile

Installation process step

Uninstall eSight system

eSight Network Security Management

Introduction to security Management

Role management

User access control

User-Defined managed domain

Security policy settings

Security monitoring

eSight Network Resource Management

Topology Management

Accessing a Resource

Creating a Subnet

Page 264: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 264

Creating an NE

Physical Resource Management

Link Management

Electronic Labels Management

NE Explorer

eSight Network Fault Management

Fault Management

Monitoring Alarms

Alarm Analysis

Setting Alarm Masking

Setting Remote Alarm Notifications

eSight Network Performance Management

Basic Concepts of Performance Management

Performance Monitoring Process

Browsing Performance Monitoring Data

eSight Configuration File Management

Backing Up NE Configuration Files

Managing NE Configuration Files

Restoring NE Configuration Files

Setting FTP and Backing Up Parameters

Smart Configuration Tool

Overall Functions Overview

Deploy by template

Deploy by Plan Sheet

Deploy Record Management

eSight System Management

Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump

Querying logs

Lower-Layer NMS

Managing Licenses

Backing Up and Restoring the Database

Managing NE Packages

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 265: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 265

3.11.3 eSight WLAN Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN

Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN management

Describe maintenance routine task of eSight WLAN

Use eSight WLAN serve management to manage WLAN equipment

Training Content

NM1B eSight WLAN Management

eSight WLAN Management

eSight WLAN management introduction

eSight WLAN management operation task

eSight WLAN Management maintenance task

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight WLAN Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1B

Page 266: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 266

3.11.4 eSight MPLS VPN Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN

Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN Automatic Discovery of eSight

Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring Services of eSight

Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN

Training Content

ONM1C eSight BGP/MPLS VPN Management

eSight BGP/MPLS VPN Management

eSight BGP/MPLS VPN management introduction

Automatic Discovery

Monitoring Services

Diagnosing Service Faults

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight MPLS VPN Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1C

Page 267: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 267

3.11.5 eSight MPLS Tunnel Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS tunnels

Configure automatic discovery of MPLS tunnels

Monitor functions of MPLS tunnels

Training Content

ONM1J eSight MPLS tunnel Management

eSight MPLS tunnel Management

Basic Concepts and Functions

Management Setting

Automatic Tunnel Discovery

Tunnel Monitoring

Monitoring Scenario

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight MPLS Tunnel Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1J

Page 268: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 268

3.11.6 eSight SLA Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the functions and basic concepts of SLA of eSight

Use the service management of SLA of eSight

Use the task management of SLA of eSight

Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight

Use the report of SLA of eSight

Training Content

ONM1D eSight SLA Management

eSight eSight SLA Management

SLA Functions and Basic Concepts

Managing SLA services

Managing SLA tasks

SLA Quick Diagnosis

SLA Report

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight SLA Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1D

Page 269: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 269

3.11.7 eSight IPSec VPN Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN

Describe eSight IPSec VPN management features

Use eSight IPSec VPN management features

Training Content

ONM1E eSight IPSec VPN Management

eSight IPSec VPN Management

IPSec VPN Application

IPSec VPN Management Operations

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight IPSec VPN Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1E

Page 270: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 270

3.11.8 eSight Smart Report Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic functions of eSight Report

Use eSight Report features

Training Content

ONM1F eSight Report Management

eSight Report Management

Report management introduction

Creating a report

Report system configuration

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight Smart Report Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1F

Page 271: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 271

3.11.9 eSight NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of NTA management

Use eSight NTA management features

Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA management

Training Content

ONM1G eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management

eSight NTA Management

What users are seeking

NTA management features

Use eSight NTA management

Application scenarios

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer) Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1G

Page 272: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 272

3.11.10 eSight Access Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe eSight access service management features

Use eSight access service management features

Describe the application scenarios of eSight access service management

Training Content

ONM1H eSight Access Management

eSight Access Management

What users are seeking

Access management features

Use eSight access management

Application scenarios

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight Access Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1H

Page 273: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 273

3.11.11 eSight Data Center Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Monitoring Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

A basic understanding of computer technology

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the needs of data center service management

Use eSight data center service management features

Describe the application scenarios of eSight data center service management

Training Content

ONM1I eSight Data Center Management

eSight Data Center Management

What users are seeking

Data center management features

Use eSight data center management

Application scenarios

Duration

0.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

eSight Data Center Management

0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise ONM1I

Page 274: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 274

3.11.12 eSight SecureCenter (VSM) Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Installers and Commissioning Staff

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the background of VSM system

Describe VSM system function

Describe VSM system structure

Describe Typical Scenarios of VSM System Application

Describe VSM System Performance index

Understand VSM Installation flow and Preparations

Be familiar with VSM Installation Process

Be familiar with VSM system Basic Operation

Understand Functional modules of VSM

Understand VSM System Technology and Application

Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of VSM

Training Content

OSS31 VSM Product Overview

Overview of the VSM

VSM Product Overview

OSS31 0.5d Lecture,

VSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration

OSS32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VSM Product Operation and Maintenance

OSS33 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 275: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 275

Background of VSM system

VSM Product feature

VSM System composition

VSM System Construction

TMN standard frame

VSM Software Architecture

VSM Networking Schemes

VSM System Function Feature

Centralized NE Management

Centralized Security Policy Management

Perfect Security Service Analysis

All-around Security Audit

Centralized NE Management

Fault Management

Performance Management

Northbound Interface Management

VSM Application Scenarios and Networking Schemes

VSM Application scene

VSM Networking Schemes

VSM Product Feature and Security

VSM Product Feature

VSM Product Security

OSS32 VSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration

VSM Installation Flow

Centralized Deployment

Distributed Deployment

VSM Installation Planning

Background Information

License Planning

Deployment Planning

NTP Service Planning

Port List

Security Planning

VSM Installation

Dividing and Mounting Disk Partitions

Applying For a License

Installing the Database for the Server

Installing the VSM Server

Installing a Log Collector

Installing the Server Monitor

VSM Basic Operation

Starting and Stopping VSM Server

Page 276: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 276

Uninstalling VSM Server

Uninstalling SQL Server Database

Uninstalling Server Monitor

OSS33 VSM Product Operation and Maintenance

Introduce VSM foundation component

NE concept

Introduce VSM foundation component

Resource Management

Discovering NEs

Synchronizing NEs

Monitoring Performance

Topology Management

Introduction to Topology Management

Configuration Process

Creating Topology Objects

Adjusting the Topology View

Alarm Management

Introduction to Alarm Management

Setting Trap Parameters on an NE

Configuring the Sound Notification

Managing Alarms

Masking the Alarms

Dumping the Alarms

Configuration Example

Security Policy Configuration

Security Policy Overview

Configuration Flow

Configuring the Security Policy

Configuring the Common Object

User Management

User Overview

Managing Users

Synchronizing Users

System Management

Service Analysis

Overview

Initialization Configuration

Configuring NEs

Traffic Analysis

Overview

Analyzing the Interface Traffic

Analyzing the Basic Traffic

Page 277: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 277

Analyzing the Application Traffic

Online Behavior Analysis

Basic Traffic Analysis

Application Analysis

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Principle

Troubleshooting Flow

Collection breakdown data

Typical Troubleshooting case

Duration

2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 278: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 278

3.11.13 eSight LogCenter (eLog) Management Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Installers and Commissioning Staff

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the background of eLog system

Describe eLog system function

Describe eLog system structure

Describe Typical Scenarios of eLog System Application

Describe eLog System Performance

Understand eLog Installation flow and Preparations

Be familiar with eLog Installation Process

Be familiar with eLog system Basic Operation

Understand Functional modules of eLog

Understand eLog System Technology and Application

Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of eLog

Training Content

OSS41 eLog Product Overview

Overview of the eLog

eLog Product Overview

OSS41 0.5d Lecture,

eLog Product Basic Installation and Configuration

OSS42 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

eLog Product Operation and Maintenance

OSS43 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 279: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 279

Log Management Status

eLog Product Positioning

eLog system function

Typical Scenarios of eLog System Application

Application Scenario of Centralized NE Management

Application Scenarios of Service Analysis

eLog Networking Schemes

Centralized Deployment Networking

Distributed Deployment Networking

Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications

Manageable Devices

Operation and Maintenance Features

Device Security

OSS42 ELog Product Basic Installation and Configuration

eLog Installation Planning

Deployment Planning

License Planning

NTP Service Planning

Port List

Security Planning

Installation Flow

Installation Flow in Centralized Deployment

Installation Flow in Distributed Deployment

Preparations

Checking Environment Requirements

Collecting Installation Information

Checking Hardware Connections

Checking the Integrity of the Software Package

eLog Installation

Installing the Operating System

Dividing and Mounting Disk Partitions

Installing the Database for the server

Installing the eLog Server

Installing a Log Collector

Installing the Server Monitor

eLog Basic Operation

Start eLog service

Uninstalling the eLog

Uninstalling the Server Monitor

OSS43 ELog Product Operation and Maintenance

eLog system server

Page 280: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 280

NEs management

Audit event management

Alarm management

Report forms management

User management

System management

Performance management

eLog Log Collector

Log collection

Log Classification

Log Filtration

Log Combination

Log Alarm and Traffic Analysis

eLog Probe

Overview

Configuration Example

eLog Console management

Console function

Start Console

Troubleshooting

Common Troubleshooting Case

Duration

2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.5 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 281: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 281

3.12 Enterprise Network Design Training Programs

3.12.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe enterprise network design principles

Describe enterprise network design basic process

Analyze general enterprise requirements for network design

Describe best practices of enterprise network design

Describe Huawei enterprise network products

Design general enterprise network

Training Content

ORS91 Enterprise Network Design Outlines

Enterprise Network Design Outlines

Enterprise network design outlines

Best practices of enterprise network design

Choosing appropriate products

Enterprise network design case study

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Enterprise Network Design Outlines

1d Lecture, Case-study ORS91

Page 282: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 282

3.12.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

A general experience in network design

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe concepts of campus network

Describe Huawei OneNet campus network solution

List common technologies in campus network

Describe Huawei OneNet campus business solution

Choose appropriate products for campus network

Training Content

ORS92 Designing Enterprise Campus Network

Designing Enterprise Campus Network

Campus network overview

Campus network solution

Campus business solution

Huawei campus network products

Campus network design cases

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Designing Enterprise Campus Network

1d Lecture, Case-study ORS92

Page 283: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 283

3.12.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Analyze of the general needs of enterprise network construction

Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN

Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS L3VPN architecture

Select the appropriate technology and solutions for enterprise networking

Choose the appropriate product for enterprise networking

Training Content

ORS93 Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise

Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise

Enterprise business analysis

MPLS L3VPN technology review

MPLS L3VPN detailed design

Choosing the appropriate products for networking

Duration

1 working day

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise

1d Lecture, Case-study ORS93

Page 284: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 284

3.12.4 Data Center Network Design Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Planners and Designers

Administrators

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A basic understanding of computer technology

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar knowledge

A general familiarity with MPLS/VPN

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Outline Data Center Network Overview

Outline Trend of Data Center Network

Outline Data Center Network Solution

List Principles of Data Center Network Design

Design Data Center Network Architecture

Design Data Center Network Areas

Design Data Center Network Panels

Design Data Center Network Services

Design Data Center Network Interconnection

Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution

Describe Data Center WAN Optimization Solution

Describe Data Center NetStream Solution

List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center Network

Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center Network Solution

List Huawei CloudEngine Products

Training Content

ORS94 Designing Data Center Network

Data Center Network Challenges Trend and Solution

Data Center Network Overview

Data Center Network Trends

Data Center Network Solution

Data Center Network Design

Data Center Architecture

Designing Data Center Network

2d Lecture ORS94

Page 285: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 285

Data Center Network Areas

Data Center Network Panels

Data Center Network Service Planning

Data Center Network Interconnection

Data Center Network Application Optimization Solution

Data Center Load-balancing Solution

Data Center WAN Optimization Solution

Data Center NetStream Solution

Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center Network Solutions

Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center Network

Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center Network Solution

Huawei CloudEngine Products Introduction

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.13 Security Technology Fundamentals Training Programs

3.13.1 Firewall Technology Fundamentals Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Prerequisites

Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.

Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.

Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.

Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration

Firewall Elementary Technology

FW01 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 286: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 286

Understand the principles of the NAT technology.

Understand the application of NAT.

Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.

Content

FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology

Basic Firewall Technology

Firewall Overview

Firewall Working Modes

Firewall Security Zones

Firewall Functions

Basic Firewall Configuration

Firewall Packet Filtering Technology

ACL Overview

Interface-based Packet Filtering

Interzone Packet Filtering

Application Analysis of Packet Filtering

Network Address Translation Technology

Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology

NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address

NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address

Bidirectional NAT Technology

NAT Application Scenario and Configuration

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 287: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 287

3.14 Security Technology Topic Training Programs

3.14.1 Firewall VPN Technical Topic Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with VPN elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the concept and functions of VPN.

Understand key VPN technologies.

Understand the classification and application of VPN.

Understand the principles of L2TP.

Understand the principles of the IPSec technology.

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology.

Understand Advanced features and configuration of IPSec VPN.

Understand Advanced features and configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.

Understand Scenarios of comprehensive VPN applications.

Troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.

Troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.

Content

FW03 Basic VPN Technology

VPN Overview

VPN Introduction

VPN technologies

VPN classification

L2TP VPN

VPDN Overview

L2TP VPN Technology

Basic VPN Technology

FW03 1.5d

Firewall VPN Technical Topic

FW0B 1.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 288: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 288

Client-Initialized L2TP

NAS-Initialized L2TP

IPSec VPN

IPSec VPN Overview

IPSec VPN Architecture

AH Technology

ESP Technology

IKE Technology

IPSec VPN Application Scenarios

SSL VPN

SSL VPN Overview

SSL VPN Technology

SSL VPN Security Policy

SSL VPN Application Scenario

FW0B Firewall VPN Technical Topic

Advanced VPN Applications of Firewalls

Review of IPSec VPN Fundamentals.

Scenarios of Advanced IPSec VPN Application.

Examples for Configuring Advanced IPSec VPN Application.

Application of L2TP over IPSec VPN.

Scenarios of L2TP + IPSEC VPN Application

Examples for Configuring L2TP over IPSec VPN Application

Comprehensive VPN Applications.

Troubleshooting for VPN

L2TP VPN troubleshooting configuration.

L2TP VPN troubleshooting ideas and steps.

L2TP VPN troubleshooting case.

IPSEC VPN configuration note.

IPSEC VPN troubleshooting configuration.

IPSEC VPN troubleshooting ideas and steps.

IPSEC VPN troubleshooting case.

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 289: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 289

3.14.2 Firewall UTM Technical Topic Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic knowledge of UTM

Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion prevention technology.

Understand major antivirus technologies for gateways

Understand the key technology of Web filtering.

Understand the mechanism of anti-spam

Understand the main DPI technology.

Troubleshooting of IPS

Troubleshooting of AV

Troubleshooting of URL filtering

Troubleshooting of RBL filtering

Troubleshooting of Internet behavior management.

Content

FW0C Firewall UTM Technical Topic

UTM Overview

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Technology

Information System Status Quo.

Intrusion Detection Overview.

Intrusion Prevention Overview.

Intrusion Detection Technology.

Intrusion Detection Model.

Intrusion Prevention Mechanism.

Product Overview.

NIP Functions.

Installing and Configuring the NIP.

IPS Function.

IPS Typical Networking.

Firewall UTM Technical Topic

FW0C 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 290: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 290

IPS Configuration.

Antivirus Technologies for Gateways

Basic Knowledge of Viruses.

Virus Signatures and Common Tools for Detecting Viruses.

Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.

Application of Antivirus Technologies for Gateways.

WEB Filtering Technologies

Overview of Web Filtering.

Concepts in URL Filtering.

URL Categorization and Filtering Techniques.

Overall Process Flow.

Malicious Web Page Detection Technologies.

Web Filtering Application Scenario.

Web Filtering in UTM.

Spam Filtering Technologies

Anti-Spam Overview.

Anti-Spam Technologies.

Application of Anti-Spam Technologies.

DPI Technologies

DPI technologies Background

DPI Overview

DPI Applications

Troubleshooting for UTM Features

Precautions for IPS Configuration.

IPS Detection Failure.

Unavailable IPS Services.

Precautions for AV Configuration.

AV Detection Failure.

Unavailable AV Services.

Precautions for URL Filtering Configuration.

URL Filtering Failure.

URL Filtering Case.

Precautions for RBL Filtering Configuration.

RBL Filtering Failure.

RBL Filtering Case.

DPI Fault Troubleshooting

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 291: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 291

3.14.3 Firewall Advanced Technology Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Advanced Firewall Security Features

Understand Firewall Reliability Technology

Understand Virtual Firewall Technology

Understand Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall

Troubleshooting of attack defense.

Troubleshooting of IP-Car.

Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup principle

Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Basic Networking and Configuration

Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Typical Networking.

Troubleshooting of HA technology.

Content

FW0D Advanced Firewall Security Features

Advanced Firewall Security Features

Packet Fragmentation.

IP CAR.

DHCP Snooping.

Firewall Reliability

IP-Link technology.

Eth-Trunk technology.

Link-Group technology.

Virtual Firewall Technology

Virtual Firewall Overview.

Advanced Firewall Security Features

FW0D 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology

FW0A 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 292: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 292

Virtual Firewall Technology Principles.

Virtual Firewall Application Analysis.

Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall

Overview of Network Attacks.

Attack Defense Technologies.

Traffic Attack and Defense Technologies.

Scanning and Sniffing Attackand Defense Technologies.

Malformed-Packet Attacks and Defense Technologies.

Special-Packet Attacks and Defense Technologies.

Attack Defense Technologies Defense on Firewalls

Troubleshooting for Firewall Advanced Features

Attack Defense troubleshooting.

IP-Car troubleshooting.

FW0A Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology

Firewall Dual-system hot backup principle

Architecture of Dual-System Hot Backup

VRRP Basic Principle

VGMP Basic Principle

HRP Basic Principle

Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Basic Networking and Configuration

Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup Typical Networking

Routing Mode + Switch

Routing Mode + Router

Routing Mode + Router/Switch

Troubleshooting of HA technology

Dual-System Hot Backup troubleshooting.

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 293: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 293

3.15 Firewall Training Programs

3.15.1 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning

Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the function and features of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the application scenario of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the basic configuration of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the basic WEB management of USG2000/5000 firewall

Content

FW11 USG2000/5000 Series Product Overview

USG2000/5000 Products Overview

Product Introduction

Hardware Architecture

Function and Feature

Application Scenario

FW12 USG2000/5000 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Installation and Configuration of Firewall

Installation Hardware

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product Overview

FW11 0.5d Lecture,

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration

FW12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 294: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 294

Initial Connection Configuration Introduction

Basic Configuration Introduction

Device Upgrade Guide

Configuration WEB Guide

Deploy Configuration

Function and Configuration

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 295: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 295

3.15.2 USG2000/5000 Low-and-middle Firewall Operation and Maintenance

Training(include Low-and-middle Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.

Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.

Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.

Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand the principles of the NAT technology.

Understand the application of NAT

Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls

Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the function and features of USG2000/5000 firewall

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product Overview

FW11 0.5d Lecture,

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration

FW12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Operation and Maintenance

FW13 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Basic Firewall Technology

Lecture, Hands-on exercise FW01 1d

Page 296: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 296

Describe the application scenario of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the basic configuration of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the basic WEB management of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the upgrade method of USG2000/5000 firewall

Understand the routine maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the typical network configuration of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the networking and configuration of USG2000/5000/UTM firewall

Describe the troubleshooting method of USG2000/5000 firewall

Content

FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology

Basic Firewall Technology

Firewall Overview

Firewall Working Modes

Firewall Security Zones

Firewall Functions

Basic Firewall Configuration

Firewall Packet Filtering Technology

ACL Overview

Interface-based Packet Filtering

Interzone Packet Filtering

Application Analysis of Packet Filtering

Network Address Translation Technology

Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology

NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address

NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address

Bidirectional NAT Technology

NAT Application Scenario and Configuration

FW11 USG2000/5000 Series Product Overview

USG2000/5000 Products Overview

Product Introduction

Hardware Architecture

Function and Feature

Application Scenario

FW12 USG2000/5000 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Installation and Configuration of Firewall

Installation Hardware

Initial Connection Configuration Introduction

Basic Configuration Introduction

Device Upgrade Guide

Configuration WEB Guide

Page 297: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 297

Deploy Configuration

Function and Configuration

FW13 USG2000/5000 Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Service Feature and Configuration of USG2000/5000 Firewall

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall NAT

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall L2TP

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall GRE

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall IPSec

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall SSL

USG2000/5000/UTM Features

Introduction to UTM feature

Networking and Configuration

Maintenance and Troubleshooting of USG2000/5000 Firewall

Routine Maintenance

Fault Analysis and solve

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 298: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 298

3.15.3 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and Commissioning

Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic knowledge of USG6600 firewall

Describe the function and features of USG6600 firewall

Describe the application scenario of USG6600 firewall

Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG6600 firewall

Describe the basic configuration of USG6600 firewall

Describe the basic WEB management of USG6600 firewall

Content

FW19 USG6600 Series Product Overview

USG6600 Products Overview

Product Introduction

Hardware Architecture

Function and Feature

Application Scenario

FW20 USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Installation and Configuration of Firewall

Installation Hardware

Initial Connection Configuration Introduction

Basic Configuration Introduction

Device Upgrade Guide

USG6600 Series Product Overview

FW19 0.5d Lecture

USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

FW20 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 299: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 299

Configuration WEB Guide

Deploy Configuration

Function and Configuration Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 300: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 300

3.15.4 USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Operation and Maintenance

Training(include USG6600 Next Generation Firewall Installation and

Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.

Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.

Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.

Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand the principles of the NAT technology.

Understand the application of NAT

Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls

Describe the basic knowledge of USG6600 firewall

Describe the function and features of USG6600 firewall

USG6600 Series Product Overview

FW19 0.5d Lecture

USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

FW20 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

USG6600 Series Product Operation and Maintenance

FW21 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Firewall Elementary Technology

Lecture, Hands-on exercise FW01 1d

Page 301: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 301

Describe the application scenario of USG6600 firewall

Describe the hardware Installation and maintenance of USG6600 firewall

Describe the basic configuration of USG6600 firewall

Describe the basic WEB management of USG6600 firewall

Describe the upgrade method of USG6600 firewall

Understand the routine maintenance of USG6600 firewall

Describe the typical network configuration of USG6600 firewall

Describe the networking and configuration of USG6600 firewall

Describe the troubleshooting method of USG6600 firewall

Content

FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology

Basic Firewall Technology

Firewall Overview

Firewall Working Modes

Firewall Security Zones

Firewall Functions

Basic Firewall Configuration

Firewall Packet Filtering Technology

ACL Overview

Interface-based Packet Filtering

Interzone Packet Filtering

Application Analysis of Packet Filtering

Network Address Translation Technology

Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology

NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address

NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address

Bidirectional NAT Technology

NAT Application Scenario and Configuration

FW19 USG6600 Series Product Overview

USG6600 Products Overview

Product Introduction

Hardware Architecture

Function and Feature

Application Scenario

FW20 USG6600 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Installation and Configuration of Firewall

Installation Hardware

Initial Connection Configuration Introduction

Basic Configuration Introduction

Device Upgrade Guide

Configuration WEB Guide

Page 302: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 302

Deploy Configuration

Function and Configuration

FW21 USG6600 Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Service Feature and Configuration of USG6600 Firewall

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall NAT

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall L2TP

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall GRE

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall IPSec

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup

Service Feature and Configuration of Firewall SSL

UTM Features

Introduction to UTM feature

Networking and Configuration

Maintenance and Troubleshooting of USG6600 Firewall

Routine Maintenance

Fault Analysis and solve Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 303: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 303

3.15.5 USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's high-end series firewall

Describe the software function of Huawei's high-end series firewall

Describe the performance parameter of Huawei's high-end series firewall system

Master USG9500 Hardware Installation

Master USG9500 Basic Configuration

Content

FW14 USG9500 Series Product Overview

USG9500 Product Overview

Network Orientation of Firewall

Hardware Structure of Firewall

Function Characteristics of Firewall

Typical Application of Firewall

FW15 USG9500 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Basic Configuration

Hardware Installation

Initial Connection Configuration

Introduction of Basic Configuration in Command Line Interface

Update Guide

Web GUI Configuration Guide

USG9500 Series Firewall Product Overview

FW14 0.5d Lecture,

USG9500 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration

FW15 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 304: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 304

Quick Start Configuration

Basic Firewall feature introduction and feature configuration

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 305: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 305

3.15.6 USG9500 High-end Firewall Operation and Maintenance Training(include

USG9500 High-end Firewall Installation and Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the definition and classification of firewalls.

Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Understand the service process and basic configuration of firewalls.

Understand the functions and classification of ACLs.

Understand Interface-based packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand Interzone packet filtering scenario and configuration

Understand the principles of the NAT technology.

Understand the application of NAT

Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls

Describe the hardware structure of Huawei's high-end series firewall

Describe the software function of Huawei's high-end series firewall

USG9500 Series Firewall Product Overview

FW14 0.5d Lecture,

USG9500 Series Firewall Basic Installation and Configuration

FW15 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Firewall Elementary Technology

Basic Firewall Technology

Lecture, Hands-on exercise FW01 1d

USG9500 Series Firewall Operation and Maintenance

FW16 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 306: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 306

Describe the performance parameter of Huawei's high-end series firewall system

Master USG9500 Hardware Installation

Master USG9500 Basic Configuration

Master USG9500 Basic Function Features and Configurations

Master USG9500 Routine Maintenance

Master Basic Principles of USG9500 Maintenance

Master USG9500 Information Collection

Master USG9500 Troubleshooting Ability

Content

FW01 Firewall Elementary Technology

Basic Firewall Technology

Firewall Overview

Firewall Working Modes

Firewall Security Zones

Firewall Functions

Basic Firewall Configuration

Firewall Packet Filtering Technology

ACL Overview

Interface-based Packet Filtering

Interzone Packet Filtering

Application Analysis of Packet Filtering

Network Address Translation Technology

Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology

NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address

NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address

Bidirectional NAT Technology

NAT Application Scenario and Configuration

FW14 USG9500 Series Product Overview

USG9500 Product Overview

Network Orientation of Firewall

Hardware Structure of Firewall

Function Characteristics of Firewall

Typical Application of Firewall

FW15 USG9500 Series Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Basic Configuration

Hardware Installation

Initial Connection Configuration

Introduction of Basic Configuration in Command Line Interface

Update Guide

Web GUI Configuration Guide

Quick Start Configuration

FW16 USG9500 Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Page 307: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 307

Function Features and Configurations

NAT Features and Configurations

L2TP Feature and Configuration

GRE Feature and Configuration

IPSec Feature and Configuration

IPS Feature and Configuration

DPI Feature and Configuration

Dual System and Configuration Operation Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Routine Maintenance

Information Collection Introduction

Basic Maintenance Task

Troubleshooting

Basic Firewall feature introduction and feature configuration

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 308: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 308

3.15.7 USG2000/5000 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance

Training(Fast-Track)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic knowledge of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the function and features of USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the application scenario of USG2000/5000 firewall

Understand firewall security zone

Understand ASPF technology

Master firewall Security Policy and configuration

Understand Packet Filtering technology

Understand NAT technology

Master the application scenarios configuration of NAT

Understand IP-link、Link-group、IP-CAR technology

Master IP-CAR configuration

Understand the principles of the IPSec VPN technology.

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology.

Master VPN basic configuration

Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup basic technology and configuration

Master principles and configuration of the IPSec Dual-System Hot Backup

Understan firewall UTM technology

Understand firewall UTM basic configuration

Understand Application and configuration of basic attack defense technologies.

Firewall Series Product Overview

FW17 1d Lecture,

Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance

FW18 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 309: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 309

Content

FW17 Firewall Series Product Overview

USG2000/5000 Series Product Overview

Product Introduction

Hardware Architecture

Function and Feature

Application Scenario

Basic Firewall Technology

Firewall Overview

Firewall Working Modes

Firewall Security Zones

Firewall Functions

Security Policy and configuration

Basic Firewall Configuration

Firewall Packet Filtering Technology

ACL Overview

Interface-based Packet Filtering

Interzone Packet Filtering

Application Analysis of Packet Filtering

Network Address Translation Technology

Introduction to Network Address Translation Technology

NAT Technology Based on the Source IP Address

NAT Technology Based on the Destination IP Address

Bidirectional NAT Technology

NAT Application Scenario and Configuration

Firewall advanced features

IP-link technology

Link-group technology

Firewall IP-CAR technology

Firewall IP-CAR configuration

FW18 Firewall Series Product Operation and Maintenance

IPSec VPN

IPSec VPN Overview

IPSec VPN Architecture

IPSec VPN Application Scenarios

IPSec VPN basic networking and configuration

SSL VPN

SSL VPN Overview

SSL VPN basic technology

SSL VPN Application Scenarios

SSL VPN basic networking and configuration

Page 310: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 310

firewall Dual-System Hot Backup technologies.

VRRP principle

VGMP principle

HRP principle

firewall Dual-System Hot Backup networking

route mode+switch networking

route mode+router networking

route mode+router/switch networking

IPSec Dual-System Hot Backup configuration

Firewall UTM basic Technology

Background of UTM

Firewall UTM basis Technology

Firewall UTM Technology Application

Basic Attack Defense Technologies on Firewall

Overview of Network Attacks

Attack Defense Technologie of flood

Attack Defense Technologie of scanning and sniffing

Attack Defense Technologie of Malformed packet

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 311: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 311

3.15.8 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the hardware architecture and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the main hardware component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the software architecture of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the application environment of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the application scenario of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Describe the hardware installation of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the physical environment requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Describe the basics configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Content

FW31 SVN Product Overview

SVN2000/5000 Products Overview

SVN2000/5000 Products Overview

SVN2000/5000 Hardware Architecture Overview

Hardware Architecture

Hardware Specifications

Main Hardware Components

SVN2000/5000 Products Function Overview

Products Function Introduction

SVN Product Overview

FW31 0.5d Lecture,

SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration

FW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 312: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 312

Products Comparison

Products Positioning

FW32 SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Hardware Installation

Checking before Unpacking

Unpacking

Acceptance After Unpacking

Mounting the Device into the Cabinet

Physical Environment Requirement

Physical Environment Requirement of SVN Device

Basics Configuration

Device Indicator Introduction of SVN Device

Login SVN

Startup Wizard Configurations of SVN Device

Basics Configuration of SVN Device

Software Upgrade of SVN Device

Import License of SVN Device

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 313: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 313

3.15.9 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training(include SVN Installation and

Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology

Grasp the configuration of SSL VPN

Understand the hardware architecture and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the main hardware component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the software architecture of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the application environment of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the application scenario of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Describe the hardware installation of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the physical environment requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Describe the basics configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the Solution deployment SVN2000/SVN500 Device

SVN Product Overview

FW31 0.5d Lecture,

SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration

FW32 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

SVN Product Operation and Maintenance

FW33 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

SSL VPN Technology

FW05 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 314: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 314

Describe the high-level function configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the System Status of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login Manage page

Understand the Common faults and positioning method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Understand the troubleshooting method of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Content

FW05 SSL VPN Technology

SSL VPN

SSL VPN Overview

SSL VPN Technology

SSL VPN Security Policy

SSL VPN Application Scenario

FW31 SVN Product Overview

SVN2000/5000 Products Overview

SVN2000/5000 Products Overview

SVN2000/5000 Hardware Architecture Overview

Hardware Architecture

Hardware Specifications

Main Hardware Components

SVN2000/5000 Products Function Overview

Products Function Introduction

Products Comparison

Products Positioning

FW32 SVN Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Hardware Installation

Checking before Unpacking

Unpacking

Acceptance After Unpacking

Mounting the Device into the Cabinet

Physical Environment Requirement

Physical Environment Requirement of SVN Device

Basics Configuration

Device Indicator Introduction of SVN Device

Login SVN

Startup Wizard Configurations of SVN Device

Basics Configuration of SVN Device

Software Upgrade of SVN Device

Import License of SVN Device

FW33 SVN Product Operation and Maintenance

Service Deployment and Configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

SVN Deployment

Page 315: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 315

Web Proxy Configuration

Network Extension Configuration

Port Forwarding Configuration

Multimedia tunnel Configuration

Smart Mobile Phone Access Configuration

File Sharing Configuration

Terminal Security Configuration

Role Function Configuration

Authentication and Authorization Configuration

Customized Page Configuration

Dual-System Hot Backup Configuration

Application Scenarios

Operation and Maintenance of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Basic Operation and Maintenance

High-level Operation and Maintenance

SVN2000/SVN5000 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Ideas

Troubleshooting Method

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 316: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 316

3.15.10 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Operators and Maintainers

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Network Orientation of ASG

Understand Hardware Structure of ASG

Understand Function Feature of ASG

Know the Typical Application of ASG

Describe ASG login method

Describe ASG Initialization configuration

Describe ASG Installation Procedure

Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG Manager

Understand Overview of Updating the signature database on ASG

Understand ASG Online Updating for the signature database

Understand ASG Local Updating for the signature database

Content

FW41 ASG Product Overview

ASG Product Orientation

ASG Product Orientation

ASG Hardware Introduction

ASG Appearance

ASG Power Module

ASG Product Overview

FW41 0.5d Lecture,

ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration

FW42 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 317: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 317

ASG Heat Dissipation System

ASG Interface Cards

ASG Software Function

Traditional firewall Feature

UTM Feature

User Management

Policy Management

Device Management

Other Feature

ASG Typical Application Network

Large-Sized Enterprises Scenario

Small to Medium-sized Enterprises Scenario

FW42 ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration

ASG Basic Configuration

Login ASG

Configuration ASG Initialization Wizard

ASG Basic Configuration

ASG Software Upgrade

ASG MANAGER System Installation

Installation procedure

Installation in Centralized Deployment

Installation in Distributed Deployment

ASG Manager Updating the signature database

Database Updating Overview

Online Update

Local Update

Example for the signature database update

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 318: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 318

3.15.11 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training(include ASG Installation and

Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Network Orientation of ASG

Understand Hardware Structure of ASG

Understand Function Feature of ASG

Know the Typical Application of ASG

Describe ASG login method

Describe ASG Initialization configuration

Describe ASG Installation Procedure

Describe the Installation Procedure of ASG Manager

Understand Overview of Updating the signature database on ASG

Understand ASG Online Updating for the signature database

Understand ASG Local Updating for the signature database

Describe the ASG product feature Introduction and Implementation of ASG

Describe the management module function of ASG

Understand ASG Manager Function Configuration

Describe the Alarm Management function of ASG Manager

ASG Product Overview

FW41 0.5d Lecture,

ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration

FW42 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ASG Product Operation and Maintenance

FW43 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 319: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 319

Describe the configuration of Alarm Management function in ASG Manager

Describe ASG Maintenance tool

Describe ASG Hardware Maintenance

Describe ASG Software Maintenance

Describe ASG Software Upgrade

Understand ASG Manager Routine Maintenance and Main method

Understand ASG Manager Software Upgrade

Understand ASG Manager fault finding in routine maintenance

Understand the basic troubleshooting knowledge

Describe ASG Manager Troubleshooting method

Content

FW41 ASG Product Overview

ASG Product Orientation

ASG Product Orientation

ASG Hardware Introduction

ASG Appearance

ASG Power Module

ASG Heat Dissipation System

ASG Interface Cards

ASG Software Function

Traditional firewall Feature

UTM Feature

User Management

Policy Management

Device Management

Other Feature

ASG Typical Application Network

Large-Sized Enterprises Scenario

Small to Medium-sized Enterprises Scenario

FW42 ASG Product Basic Installation and Configuration

ASG Basic Configuration

Login ASG

Configuration ASG Initialization Wizard

ASG Basic Configuration

ASG Software Upgrade

ASG MANAGER System Installation

Installation procedure

Installation in Centralized Deployment

Installation in Distributed Deployment

ASG Manager Updating the signature database

Database Updating Overview

Online Update

Page 320: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 320

Local Update

Example for the signature database update

FW43 ASG Product Operation and Maintenance

ASG Feature Configuration

ASG Panel

ASG Software Architecture and Explanation

ASG Basic Function Configuration

ASG Manager Products Basic Configuration

Device Management

Synchronizing Configuration

Collector Management

ASG Manager Alarm management

Alarm Management Overview

Alarm Management Function

Alarm Management Configuration

Alarm Handling

Search, Confirm and Refresh Alarm

ASG Routine Maintenance

Maintenance Tool

Device Maintenance

Software Maintenance

Version Upgrade

ASG Manager Routine Maintenance

Routine Maintenance

Version Upgrade

Troubleshooting

ASG Manager Troubleshooting

Fundamentals of Troubleshooting

ASG Manager Fundamentals of Troubleshooting

ASG Manager Fault Diagnosis Method

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 321: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 321

3.16 Security Management Software Training Programs

3.16.1 Policy Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with OS.

Be familiar with Terminal security elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the background of Policy Center system

Describe Policy Center system function and system structure.

Describe the function of each component.

Understand Typical Scenarios of Policy Center System Application

Describe Policy Center System Performance index

Understand Policy Center Installation Planning and Preparations

Be familiar with Policy Center Installation Process

Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic Operation

Content

SS11 Policy Center Product Overview

Overview of the Policy Center

Background of Policy Center

Policy Center Product Overview

Policy Center Product Features

Policy Center System Components

Terminal Management Center (TMC)

Policy Center Product Overview

SS11 0.5d Lecture,

Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration

SS12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 322: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 322

Policy Center Manager

Policy Center Controller

Scanner

Security access control gateway

The 802.1x switch

Policy Center Agent

Policy Center Configuration Requirements

Server Configuration Requirements

Configuration Requirements for the Client

Introduce Functions of the Policy Center

Security Management of Terminal Hosts

Behavior Management of Terminal Users

Security Access Control

Mobile Storage Device Management

Software Distribution

Patch Management

Asset Management

Policy Center Networking Applications

Centralized Networking

Distributed Networking

Hierarchical Networking

Policy Center performance specifications

SS12 Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Policy Center Installation Planning and Preparations

Introduce Installation Process

Installing the Policy Center

Installing the Policy Center M Manager

Installing the Policy Center Controller

Installing a Scanner

Installing a User-defined Policy Editor

Installing the Policy Center Server Monitor

Initializing the Policy Center

Starting and Stopping the Policy Center

Removing the Policy Center

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 323: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 323

3.16.2 Policy Center(TSM) Operation and Maintenance Training(include Policy

Center(TSM) Installation and Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with OS.

Be familiar with Terminal security elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the background of terminal security.

Understand Policy Center System Architecture

Understand Policy Center System Functions

Be familiar with the Typical Scenarios of Policy Center System Application

Describe the background of Policy Center system

Describe Policy Center system function and system structure.

Describe the function of each component.

Understand Typical Scenarios of Policy Center System Application

Describe Policy Center System Performance index

Understand Policy Center Installation Planning and Preparations

Policy Center Product Overview

SS11 0.5d Lecture,

Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration

SS12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Policy Center Product Operation and Maintenance

SS13 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Basic Terminal Security Technology

SS01 1d Lecture,

Page 324: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 324

Be familiar with Policy Center Installation Process

Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic Operation

Understand Functional modules of Policy Center

Understand Policy Center System Technology and Application

Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of Policy Center

Content

SS01 Basic Terminal Security Technology

Terminal Security Overview

Security Threats Faced by Intranets.

Challenges to Terminal Security Solutions.

Policy Center System Application

Introduce Policy Center System

Multidimensional Defense System for Terminal Security.

Deployment of the Policy Center System

Deployment of Terminal Security Policies

SS11 Policy Center Product Overview

Overview of the Policy Center

Background of Policy Center

Policy Center Product Overview

Policy Center Product Features

Policy Center System Components

Terminal Management Center (TMC)

Policy Center Manager

Policy Center Controller

Scanner

Security access control gateway

The 802.1x switch

Policy Center Agent

Policy Center Configuration Requirements

Server Configuration Requirements

Configuration Requirements for the Client

Introduce Functions of the Policy Center

Security Management of Terminal Hosts

Behavior Management of Terminal Users

Security Access Control

Mobile Storage Device Management

Software Distribution

Patch Management

Asset Management

Policy Center Networking Applications

Centralized Networking

Page 325: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 325

Distributed Networking

Hierarchical Networking

Policy Center performance specifications

SS12 Policy Center Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Policy Center M Installation Planning and Preparations

Introduce Installation Process

Installing the TMC

Installing the Policy Center Manager

Installing the Policy Center Controller

Installing a Scanner

Installing a User-defined Policy Editor

Installing the Policy Center Server Monitor

Initializing the Policy Center

Starting and Stopping the Policy Center

Removing the Policy Center

SS13 Policy Center Product Operation and Maintenance

Policy Center System Function Overview

Policy Center System Technology and Application

Technology and Application of Organization Management

Technology and Application of Inter-Terminal Access Control

Technology and Application of Security Policy Management

Technology and Application of Software distribution

Technology and Application of Patch Management

Technology and Application of Asset Management

Policy Center Routine maintenance

Policy Center System maintenance

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 326: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 326

3.16.3 DSM Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with OS.

Be familiar with Terminal security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Be familiar with document security elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the background of DSM system

Describe DSM system function and system structure.

Describe Typical Scenarios of DSM System Application

Describe DSM System Performance index

Understand DSM Installation Planning and Preparations

Be familiar with DSM Installation Process

Be familiar with DSM system Basic Operation

Understand Functional modules of DSM

Understand DSM System Technology and Application

Be familiar with Operation and Maintenance of DSM

Content

SS21 DSM Product Overview

Overview of the DSM

DSM Product Overview

SS21 0.5d Lecture,

DSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration

SS22 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

DSM Product Operation and Maintenance

SS23 1d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 327: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 327

Current security status and security threats of enterprise documents

Describe Importance of the DSM.

DSM System Components

DSM Functions and Features

User and Department Management

Document Permission Management

Group Policies and Permission Templates

Cross system authorization

Log management

Documents type and editor

DSM Deployment

DSM Centralized Deployment

DSM Distributed Deployment

DSM Performance Specifications

Server Performance Specifications

Client Performance Specifications

SS22 DSM Product Basic Installation and Configuration

DSM Installation Planning

Planning Departments and Accounts

License Planning

Disk Partition Scheme

Description of Open Ports

Safety Precautions

Installation Preparations

Installing Microsoft Windows Server

Installing the Microsoft SQL Server

Changing the Setting of the Data Protection Function

Obtaining an ESN

DSM Installation

Installing the DSM Management Center

Installing the DSM Server

Configuring the Database Backup Tool

Installing the DSM Client

DSM Basic Operation

Starting and Stopping the DSM

Configuring the DSM

Uninstalling the DSM

Maintaining the Microsoft SQL Server

SS23 DSM Product Operation and Maintenance

DSM Management Center System Administrator Operation

Configuring the DSM Management Center

License Management

Page 328: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 328

Managing the Weight of the DSM Management Center

Management Node Management

Department Management

Managing Group Policies

System Alarm Management

DSM Server System Administrator Operation

Planning Departments and Accounts

Department Management

Managing Document Administrators

Managing Group Policies

System Information Management

Managing the Weight of the DSM Server

Customizing Copyright Information

Configuring the Email Server

DSM Server Department Log Administrator Operation

Department Management

Managing Document Permissions

Department Log Management

Department Log Administrator Management

DSM Client Operation

Basic Concepts

Login

Security Document Management

Upgrading the DSM Client

Common DSM trouble shooting method

System warning inquired

Invalidity of Offline Permissions

Database break-down shifts

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 329: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 329

3.17 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs

3.17.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Administrators

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device

Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device

Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS Device

Understand the hardware architecture of NIP Device

Understand the hardware specifications of NIP Device

Understand the hardware main component of NIP Device

Understand the software architecture of NIP

Understand the software application scenario of NIP Device

Understand the hardware installation of NIP Device

Understand the physical environment of NIP Device

Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device

Content

NI11 NIP Product Overview

NIP Introduction

NIP Introduction

IPS/IDS Hardware Overview

IPS/IDS Software Overview

NIP Product Overview

NI11 0.5d Lecture,

NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration

NI12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 330: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 330

The NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction

NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction

NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Specifications Introduction

NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Main Component Introduction

NIP Software Architecture and Function Introduction

NIP Software Architecture Introduction

NIP Software Application Scenario Introduction

NI12 NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Hardware Installation Introduction of NIP Device

Hardware Installation Introduction NIP Device

Physical Environment Requirement of NIP Device

Physical Environment Requirement NIP Device

NIP Configuration

Basic Console Networking Configuration

NIP Configuration

Duration

1 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 331: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 331

3.17.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training(include NIP Installation and

Commissioning Training)

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device

Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS Device

Understand the software Function of IPS/IDS Device

Understand the hardware architecture of NIP Device

Understand the hardware specifications of NIP Device

Understand the hardware main component of NIP Device

Understand the software architecture of NIP

Understand the software application scenario of NIP Device

Understand the hardware installation of NIP Device

Understand the physical environment of NIP Device

Understand the basic configuration of NIP Device

Grasp Application control of IPS Device

Grasp Application control of IDS Device

Grasp Threat Prevention of IPS Device

Grasp Threat Prevention of IDS Device

Grasp Typical Application scene of IPS Device

NIP Product Overview

NI11 0.5d Lecture,

NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration

NI12 0.5d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

NIP Product Operation and Maintenance

NI13 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 332: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 332

Grasp Typical Application scene of IDS Device

Grasp the maintenance operations of NIP Device

Grasp the software patches of NIP Device

Grasp the Troubleshooting of NIP Device

Content

NI11 NIP Product Overview

NIP Introduction

NIP Introduction

IPS/IDS Hardware Overview

IPS/IDS Software Overview

The NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction

NIP Hardware Architecture Introduction

NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Specifications Introduction

NIP Software Architecture Introduction NIP Hardware Main Component Introduction

NIP Software Architecture and Function Introduction

NIP Software Architecture Introduction

NIP Software Application Scenario Introduction

NI12 NIP Product Basic Installation and Configuration

Hardware Installation Introduction of NIP Device

Hardware Installation Introduction NIP Device

Physical Environment Requirement of NIP Device

Physical Environment Requirement NIP Device

NIP Configuration

Basic Console Networking Configuration

NIP Configuration

NI13 NIP Product Operation and Maintenance

NIP2000、5000 Application Security

Application Security Overview

Composition of Application Security Policies

Application Security (IDS Device)

Application Security (IPS Device)

NIP2000、5000 Traffic Security

Traffic Security Overview

Common DDoS attacks

Traffic Security (IPS Device)

Traffic Security (IDS Device)

NIP2000、5000 typical Application scene

Typical Application scene of IPS Device

Typical Application scene of IDS Device

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Maintenance operations of NIP Device

Software patches of NIP Device

Page 333: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 333

Troubleshooting of NIP Device

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 334: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 334

3.18 Security Solution Operation and Maintenance Training Programs

3.18.1 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei DDos Product Component

Describe DDos Network Orientation and Typical Application

Describe Principle of DDoS attack and DDoS defense technology

Understand network Design of management Center

Understand network Design of Detecting Center

Understand network Design of Cleaning Center

Understand mirroring traffic, monitor network traffic and redirection traffic in DDoS Solution

Master basic configuration and system management

Master DDoS Product Management and Customer Management

Master DDoS Solution Report management and System maintenance

Content

SU11 DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance

Principle of DDOS Technology

Overview Of DDoS Attack

The Process of DDOS Defense

DDOS Defense technology

Anti-DDOS Solution Introduction

What is DDOS

Anti-DDOS Defense System Component

Anti-DDOS Function Introduction DDOS Defense Technology

Common ATIC system Networking Introduction

Mirroring traffic Solution and Redirection Traffic Solution

USG9300 Anti-DDOS Solution

DDoS Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

SU11 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 335: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 335

Huawei’s abnormal traffic monitor Solution

Anti-DDoS USG9300 Product Overview

Check and Clearing Traffic Technology

Management center

ADG5300 Anti-DDoS Solution

Security Zone and ACL

Blacklist

Port mapping and ASPF

Implementation of management center

Installation of management center

DDOS management center configuration Guide

Anti-DDoS Solution networking

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 336: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 336

3.18.2 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe iSOC Orientation and product value

Master iSOC System architecture and system component

Master iSOC main function feature

Know the iSOC Application Network

Know the iSOC installation process

Master iSOC initial deployment

Master iSOC basic Function configuration

Know the Routine Maintenance task

Master quick solve issue in iSoc system fault

Know the information collection in basic fault

Master Troubleshooting Process

Know Common fault in iSoc

Content

SU31 iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance

iSOC Solution Overview

Solution overview

System Component

Function Feature

iSOC Installation and Configuration

Hardware Installation

Initiation

Basic Function Configuration

iSOC Operation Maintenance

Routine Maintenance Process

System Maintenance

iSOC Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

SU31 3d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 337: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 337

Hardware Maintenance

Backup and Restore Policy

iSOC Troubleshooting

Basic fundamental of Troubleshooting

The Common fault

Module replacement

Duration

3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 338: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 338

3.18.3 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with PC operation system

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe UMA orientation and product value

Master UMA system architecture and system component

Master UMA main function feature

Know the UMA application network

Master UMA initial configuration

Master UMA basic function configuration

Know Common fault finding in UMA

Content

SU41 UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance

Background of IT Operation maintenance audit

IT Operation maintenance audit

Definition

Basic System architecture

Basic Management Process

UMA Solution Overview

UMA Solution Overview

Solution Value

Implementation UMA

System common management

System User management

User Authentication management

Host Asset management

Audit Management

UMA Troubleshooting

System Configuration FAQ

UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

SU41 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 339: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 339

Assistance Process and Standard

Fault finding

Emergency Maintenance

Duration

2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 340: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 340

3.18.4 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Prerequisites

A basic understanding of computer technology

Be familiar with data communications network elementary knowledge

Be familiar with network security elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN technology

Understand the configuration of SSL VPN

Understand the hardware architecture and Specifications of Anyoffice Device

Understand the main hardware component of Anyoffice Device

Understand the software architecture of Anyoffice Device

Understand the application environment of Anyoffice Device

Understand the application scenario of Anyoffice Device

Describe the basics configuration of Anyoffice Device

Understand the Solution deployment Anyoffice Device

Describe the high-level function configuration of Anyoffice Device

Describe the Anyoffice Deployment and Mobile Configuration of Anyoffice Device

Understand the Common faults and positioning method of Anyoffice Device

Understand the troubleshooting method of Anyoffice Device

Content

SU42 Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance

SSL VPN

SSL VPN Overview

SSL VPN Technology

SSL VPN Security Policy

SSL VPN Application Scenario

SVN2000/5000 Products Overview

SVN2000/5000 Products Overview

SVN2000/5000 Hardware Architecture Overview

Hardware Architecture

Hardware Specifications

Anyoffice Solution Operation and Maintenance Training

SU42 2d Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Page 341: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 341

Main Hardware Components

SVN2000/5000 Products Function Overview

Products Function Introduction

Products Comparison

Products Positioning

Hardware Installation

Checking before Unpacking

Unpacking

Acceptance After Unpacking

Mounting the Device into the Cabinet

Physical Environment Requirement

Physical Environment Requirement of SVN Device

SVN Basics Configuration

Device Indicator Introduction of SVN Device

Login SVN

Startup Wizard Configurations of SVN Device

Basics Configuration of SVN Device

Software Upgrade of SVN Device

Import License of SVN Device

MDM Basics Configuration

Device Indicator Introduction of MDM Device

Login MDM

Startup Wizard Configurations of MDM Device

Basics Configuration of MDM Device

Software Upgrade of MDM Device

Import License of MDM Device

Anyoffice Deployment and Mobile Configuration of Anyoffice Device

Security Broswer

Security Mail Policy

Anyoffice Deployment and Configuration of Anyoffice Device

Application Procedure

Application Scenarios

Service Deployment and Configuration

Operation and Maintenance of Anyoffice Device

Basic Operation and Maintenance

High-level Operation and Maintenance

Anyoffice Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Method

Duration

2 working days

Page 342: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 342

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Page 343: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 343

3.19 Security Planning and Design Training Programs

3.19.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Planners and Designers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Understand Huawei Security Concept

Understand Huawei Security Competence Center

Be familiar with Huawei Security Products

Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security Products Application and Solution

Content

FW04 Firewall Planning and Design

Introduce Huawei Security Concept

Introduce Huawei Security Competence Center

Introduce Huawei Security Products

Firewall/UTM Products

SRG Products

SVN Products

NIP Products

Security Management Software

Application Scenarios and Solution Design

The Typical Scenarios of Firewall Application Design

DDOS Solution Design

Data Center Security Solution Design

Integration Intranet Security Solution Design

VPN Solution Design

Duration

1 working days

Firewall Planning and Design

FW04 1d Lecture,

Page 344: Huawei_Training Description for Enterprise Network

COMMERCIAL IN CONFIDENCE 344

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12